for QSC models including: QSC TOUCHMIX8, QSC,,QSC,TouchMix-8,Compact,Digital,Mixer,with,Bag,TouchMix-8,Digital,Mixer,B07BN45WKH,B00KDX7W4Q,B00KDX7TC6,B01LZYUJL6
Qsc Touchmix 8 Manual Pdf - User Guide - UNS
Qsc Touchmix 8 Manual Pdf
TouchMixTM
®
User Manual
TouchMix-30 Pro Firmware Version 2.0 TouchMix-16 Firmware Version 3.0 TouchMix-8 Firmware Version 3.0
1001108-01-F
*1001108-01*
EXPLANATION OF TERMS AND SYMBOLS
The term "WARNING!" indicates instructions regarding personal safety. If the instructions are not followed the result may be bodily injury or death. The term "CAUTION!" indicates instructions regarding possible damage to physical equipment. If these instructions are not followed, it may result in damage to the equipment that may not be covered under the warranty.
The term "IMPORTANT!" indicates instructions or information that are vital to the successful completion of the procedure. The term "NOTE" is used to indicate additional useful information.
The intent of the lightning flash with arrowhead symbol in a triangle is to alert the user to the presence of un-insulated "dangerous" voltage within the product's enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to humans.
The intent of the exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is to alert the user to the presence of important safety, and operating and maintenance instructions in this manual.
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
WARNING!: TO PREVENT FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS EQUIPMENT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. Maximum ambient operating temperature is 40°C (104°F).
WARNING!: DO NOT LEAVE THE TouchMix-8 / TouchMix-16 POWER SUPPLY UNATTENDED WHEN PLUGGED IN. Always unplug the power supply from the electric outlet immediately after use.
1. Read these instructions. 2. Keep these instructions. 3. Heed all warnings. 4. Follow all instructions. 5. Do not use this apparatus near water. 6. Do not submerge the apparatus in water or liquids. 7. Do not use any aerosol spray, cleaner, disinfectant or fumigant on, near or into the apparatus. 8. Clean only with a dry cloth. 9. Do not block any ventilation opening. Install in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 10. Keep all ventilation openings free of dust or other matter. 11. Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat. 12. To reduce the risk of electrical shock, the power cord shall be connected to a mains socket outlet with a protective earthing connection. 13. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or groundingtype plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other. A
grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet. 14. Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus. 15. Do not unplug the unit by pulling on the cord, use the plug. 16. Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer. 17. Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time. 18. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as powersupply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped. 19. The appliance coupler, or the AC Mains plug, is the AC mains disconnect device and shall remain readily accessible after installation. 20. Adhere to all applicable, local codes. 21. Consult a licensed, professional engineer when any doubt or questions arise regarding a physical equipment installation. 22. Inspect the apparatus, including the power supply for signs of external wear and tear or signs of damage. All damage to the apparatus should be immediately repaired by a QSC authorized service station or QSC International Distributor. Failure to perform necessary repairs could lead to additional damage or to safety hazards. Failure to perform necessary repairs voids the limited warranty and QSC is not responsible for any injury, harm or related damages arising from any failure to perform those repairs.
1001108-01-F
ii
Maintenance and Repair
WARNING!: Advance technology, e.g., the use of modern materials and powerful electronics, requires specially adapted maintenance and repair methods. To avoid a danger of subsequent damage to the apparatus, injuries to persons and/or the creation of additional safety hazards, all maintenance or repair work on the apparatus should be performed only by a QSC authorized service station or an authorized QSC International Distributor. QSC is not responsible for any injury, harm or related damages arising from any failure of the customer, owner or user of the apparatus to facilitate those repairs.
FCC Statement
NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: · Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. · Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. · Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. · Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Warranty
For a copy of the QSC Limited Warranty, visit the QSC website at www.qsc.com Para una copia de la Garantía Limitada de QSC, visite el sitio web de QSC, en www.qsc.com Pour obtenir une copie de la garantie limitée de QSC, visitez le site de QSC à www.qsc.com Besuchen Sie die Webseite von QSC (www.qsc.com) um eine Kopie der beschräenkte Garantie von QSC zu erhalten. QSCQSCwww.qsc.com , QSC www.qsc.com
www.qsc.com QSC QSC
1001108-01-F
iii
Table of Contents
Maintenance and Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii FCC Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii Warranty. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii Register and Update. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 TouchMix-30 Pro Package Contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 TouchMix-8 / TouchMix-16 Package Contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 About This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Getting Started. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Turn off Demo Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Recall a Factory Scene . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
What is a Scene?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Build a Mix Using Factory Presets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Auxiliary Outputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Effects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Name the Effects Channels (or Mixes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Using the FX Wizard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Using the Input Channel FX Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Pitch Correct. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Using Pitch Correct. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Using the FX Channel Effect Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Using the FX Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Mute Groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 DCA Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Sub Groups (TouchMix-30 Pro only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Using Auxiliaries as Sub Groups (TouchMix-8 and 16 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Matrix Mixing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Save Your Work as a Scene. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Sound Check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Using TouchMix with QSC Amplifiers and Loudspeakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Loudspeaker Gain and Preset Pop-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Select a QSC Loudspeaker Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 QSC GXD Amplifier Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Phantom Power (+48V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Work on Your Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1001108-01-E
iv
Simple and Advanced Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Auxiliary (Stage Monitor) Mixes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Input by Input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Mix On Faders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Output Processing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Overview Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 PEQ Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 GEQ Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Anti-Feedback Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Limiter Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Auxes Tab (TouchMix-30 Pro only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Presets Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Setup Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Multi-Track Playback & Mix Down. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Mix Down. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 DAW Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Anti-Feedback System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Manually Ringing Out a System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Using the Feedback Wizard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Pre-Feedback Wizard Checklist: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 More about the Anti-Feedback System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Real Time Analyzer (RTA). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Mutes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Copy & Paste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Patch Matrix (TouchMix-30 Pro only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Room Tuning Wizard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
TouchMix-30 Pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 TouchTouchMix-16ix-8 or 22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 User Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 MIDI Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Monitor (TouchMix-30 Pro only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Monitor (TouchMix-16 only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Solo In Place (SIP) (TouchMix-30 Pro only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
1001108-01-E
v
Getting Started. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Top Panel and Remote-Device Controls (TouchMix-30 Pro). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Rear Panel (TouchMix-30 Pro). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Left Side of the TouchMix-16 Mixing Surface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Left Side of the TouchMix-8 Mixing Surface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Right Side of the TouchMix-16 Mixing Surface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Right Side of the TouchMix-8 Mixing Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Rear Panel (TouchMix-16). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Rear Panel (TouchMix-8). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 TouchMix-30 Pro Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 TouchMix-8 and TouchMix-16 Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 TouchMix Feature List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Nav Strip. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Channel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Input Channels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Input Channel - Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Input Channel Analog Trim. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Input Channel EQ. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Input Channel Compressor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Input Channel Gate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Input Channel FX Sends. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
FX Signal Flow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Input Channel Aux Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Auxiliary Channel Flow Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Input Channel Presets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Input Channel Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Output Channel Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Output Channels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Output Channel GEQ. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Output Channel PEQ. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Output Channel Compressor / Limiter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Output Channel Anti-Feedback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Output Channel Auxes (TouchMix-30 Pro only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Output Channel Presets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Output Channel Setup / Delay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Output Channel Speaker Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Output Channel GXD Amp Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Aux Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Sub Group Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
1001108-01-E
vi
Sub Groups (TouchMix-30 Pro only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Sub Group PEQ (TouchMix-30 Pro only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Sub Group Compressor / Limiter (TouchMix-30 Pro only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Sub Group FX Sends (TouchMix-30 Pro only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Sub Group Auxes (TouchMix-30 Pro only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Sub Group Presets (TouchMix-30 Pro only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Sub Group Setup (TouchMix-30 Pro only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
2-Trk Playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 2-Trk Playback Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 2-Trk Playback EQ. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 2-Trk Playback Audio Player. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 2-Trk Playback Auxes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 2-Trk Playback Presets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 2-Trk / Multitrack Playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 FX Master Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
FX Masters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 FX Masters EQ. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 FX Masters Presets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 FX Masters Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 FX Masters Auxes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 FX Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 FX Wizard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Wizards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Gain Wizard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Room Tuning Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 FX Processor Basic Chorus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
FX Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 FX Processor Dense Reverb. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 FX Processor Lush Reverb. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 FX Processor Mono and Stereo Delay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 FX Processor Pitch Shift. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 FX Processor Pitch Correct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Remote Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Login Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Security Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
1001108-01-E
vii
Miscellaneous Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Remote Control Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 User Buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Mixer Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Phantom Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Mute Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
About Mute Groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Mute Groups Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Mute Group Edit Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Record / Playback (Multitrack USB Drive). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 2-Trk Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 2-Trk Recording Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 DAW Record / Playback (TouchMix-30 Pro only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Real-time Analyzer (RTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Scenes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Channel Safe. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Auto Mixer TouchMix-30 Pro. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 External Control Surfaces - TouchMix-30 Pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Custom Fader Banks - TouchMix-30 Pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Set up the Custom Fader Banks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 DCA Group Assignments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 About DCA Groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 MIDI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Talkback / Noise. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 TouchMix Wi-Fi Contro.l . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Before You Begin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Wi-Fi Router Access Point. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Setting it Up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Wireless Network Setup: Create New Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Wireless Network Setup: Connect to Existing Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Wired Network Setup: Static IP Address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Wired Network Setup: Auto IP Address (DHCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Phones and Monitor TouchMix-30 Pro. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 TouchMix-8 and TouchMix-16 Phones and TouchMix-16 Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Recording Setup - Multitrack USB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Recall Session - Multitrack USB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Aux Mix on Faders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Patch Matrix (TouchMix-30 Pro only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Copy and Paste. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
1001108-01-E
viii
TouchMix-30 Pro. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 TouchMix-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 TouchMix-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Mic/Line Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Stereo Input Channels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Main Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Stereo Auxiliary Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Mono Auxiliary Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Stereo Sub Group (TouchMix-30 only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Mono Sub Group (TouchMix-30 only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Cue, Monitor, Talkback, Noise. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 FX Return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 2-Track Playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 RTA (Real Time Analyzer). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
1001108-01-E
ix
TouchMixTM How To
IMPORTANT: This User Manual applies to mixers with TouchMix-30 Pro Firmware Version 3.0, or TouchMix-8 and TouchMix-16 Firmware Version 1.2 installed. Earlier firmware releases do not support all of the functions described and some operations may differ.
Register and Update
STOP
We know you want to get right to using your TouchMix mixer, but before you do please stop and take a moment to visit www.qsc.com and register your TouchMix. By registering you can...
· Download the latest firmware so that your mixer has all the latest features, refinements and performance enhancements.
· Sign up to be notified of future updates.
· Check to see if you are eligible for free extended warranty coverage.
While you're there, you can also find videos and other tools to help you get the most from your TouchMix-30 Pro.
TouchMix-30 Pro Package Contents
1. TouchMix-30 Pro Mixer 2. Quick Start Guide TouchMix-30 Pro (TD-000509) 3. Warning Information Sheet (TD-000430) 4. Limited Warranty (TD-000453-01 English)
5. One of the following power cords 6. North America TouchMix-30 Pro, 2M, V-Lock 7. Europe TouchMix-30 Pro, 2M, V-Lock
TouchMix-8 / TouchMix-16 Package Contents
1. TouchMix-16 or TouchMix-8 2. Quick-Start Guide (TD-000445 or TD-000446) 3. Warning Information Sheet 4. Limited Warranty (TD-000453-01 English)
5. USB Wi-Fi adaptor (installed in mixer's USB port) 6. Power supply with IEC cable (AC connector type varies by region) 7. TouchMix carrying case
About This Manual
This manual covers the features and operation of the TouchMix-8, TouchMix-16 (with firmware version 3.0) and TouchMix-30 Pro (with software version 2.0). These mixers share many features and operational similarities but differ in other respects most significantly, input and output channel count. Features and functions that are unique to just one model are identified as such.
Getting Started
Since your TouchMix is a digital mixer there are lots of things you can do off-line to save time during setup and help you get acquainted with your mixer. We highly recommend spending a little quality time with the mixer before taking it to a show for the first time.
Turn off Demo Mode
Demo mode is a looping slide show that plays as a factory default to give prospective buyers an overview of the mixer. You'll probably want to turn Demo Mode off even though our graphics guys are really proud of how it looks.
To Disable Demo Mode: Menu
Mixer Setup
Demo Mode Off
On
1001108-01-E
1
Recall a Factory Scene
What is a Scene?
Scenes allow storage and recall of mixer settings. A Scene includes all channel-processing settings, channel Names, Phantom Power settings, Effects selections, DCA, Sub Group and Mute Group assignments. Scenes also include level settings. Factory scenes are stored with input faders at minimum to prevent any surprises (feedback, music at 20 dB above the threshold of pain, etc.) when the scene is recalled. User scenes are stored with levels set as they were when the scene was saved. User scenes may be stored to internal memory and to an external USB storage device. There are circumstances when it's useful to recall a scene but omit certain settings from being changed. The TouchMix-30 Pro offers these Recall Options: · Omit Levels: When switched on, the scene will be recalled without making any change to any level settings.
· Omit Outputs: When switched on, the scene will be recalled without making any change to any output EQ, comp/limiter or level settings. This is especially useful when recalling a scene after the mixer's outputs have been adjusted for a particular venue and speaker system.
· Omit Routing: When switched on, the scene will be recalled without making any change to routing such as Sub Group assignments and pre/ post selections.
Your TouchMix is loaded with pre-defined scenes for various kinds of performances. You can find the one that's most like the show you'll be mixing and start there.
Scene:
To Recall a Factory Scene: Default
Factory Defualt Horn Band Rock Band
Recall
The factory scenes list includes a scene named Default. This scene will "zero" the mixer by returning all controls to their factory settings.
Scene:
To Zero the mixer: Default
Factory Defualt Horn Band Rock Band
Recall
If you'd like to navigate around the mix and see what the recalled settings are, return to the
screen.
Build a Mix Using Factory Presets
What is a Channel Preset?
A Channel Preset consists of settings for a single channel that are saved and can be recalled for use at a later time. A Channel Preset includes settings for the channel EQ, Compressor and Gate. The channel name, phantom power setting and level settings are also stored with the preset but may be omitted from a preset recall by setting the Recall Options switches at the bottom of the presets screen.
Your TouchMix includes over 120 channel presets that were programmed to work with common microphones in real, live sound applications by skilled and experienced concert-sound mix-engineers. And they work. Those who have used TouchMix-30 Pro report great results using the presets with little or no modification. You can also save your own channel presets to the mixer's internal memory or to an external USB storage device.
To Select Channel Presets:
Inputs 1-8
In 1
Presets
1. Make sure that the Factory / User switch is in the Factory position. 2. In the left window you'll see a list of instrument categories. Touch an instrument category name and a list of specific instruments appears in the
middle window.
3. Select a type of instrument and the right window will display a list of options for that instrument. There may be options with and without gates and compressors as well as options for various types of microphones and pick-ups or different styles of music. Select the one that seems best for your application.
To Learn About the Selected Preset: Preset Name
Select any item
Preset Info
To Recall the Preset: Preset Name
Select any item
Recall
Yes
1001108-01-E
2
You've just dialed in the settings for an input channel. You'll also notice that the channel has been given a name that corresponds with the instrument you selected. You can leave the name as is or rename the channel.
To Name a Channel: Setup
Mic Joe's Mic
Enter
Go to the Next Channel:
Next
Repeat the process until you've set up all the channels you need.
Auxiliary Outputs
What is an Auxiliary?
In addition to the Main L/R (left/right) output mix, your TouchMix mixer is capable of controlling 4 (TouchMix-8), 8 (TouchMix-16) or 14 (TouchMix-30 Pro) additional output mixes.
These Auxiliary mixes are typically used to drive stage monitor speaker systems or in-ear monitors (IEM) for performers. They may also be used for a recording mix, audio feed to video or a send to an overflow area. In any case, it makes sense to label the auxiliary outputs to help keep them straight during use. Type in a name for the output it could be the name of the performer who gets that mix or it could be something like "Singers" or "Horns" or "Video" or "Patio".
To name an auxiliary output:
Aux Masters
Aux 1
Setup
Aux Joe's Monitor
The name will be displayed on the aux mix selector buttons on the left side of the screen. Auxes may also be linked so that two mono mixes become one stereo mix.
To Link two Auxes:
Aux Masters
Aux 1
Setup
Link
Link
TouchMix-30 Pro A pair of TRS headphone outputs labelled Aux 11/12 and Aux 13/14 may be found on the mixer's rear panel. These outputs receive their signal from the corresponding Auxiliary Mixes and are intended to drive wired, In Ear Monitors (IEM). If using these outputs, it's recommended that the Auxiliary mixes driving these headphone outputs be linked for stereo operation.
TouchMix-8 A single TRS headphone output labelled Aux 3/4 may be found on the mixer's rear panel. TouchMix-16 A pair of TRS headphone outputs labelled Aux 7/8 and Aux 9/10 may be found on the mixer's top panel. These unbalanced, stereo outputs may also be configured as balanced, mono, line-level outputs (see the Aux output channel Setup tab).
Effects
Audio effects (FX) such as reverb, delay, chorus, pitch shift (pitch change) and pitch correct are essential in today's audio production.
The TouchMix-30 Pro has six multi-effects processors or "engines" while the TouchMix-8 and TouchMix-16 have four. All of these processors may be configured to be one of six different effects including Lush Reverb, Dense Reverb, Chorus, Mono Delay, Stereo Delay and Pitch Shift.
Each of these effects have multiple presets. The reverb processors, for example have presets simulating various sizes of rooms and halls as well as reverb plates. In addition, there are brighter and darker sounding variations.
Along with the above effects, there is a Pitch Correct effect that can be assigned (inserted) to any one of the input channels.
Name the Effects Channels (or Mixes)
In the middle of a show it's easy to forget which effect was intended for what performers or instruments so this would be a great time to name the Effects Send channels. For example, you might name an FX channel "Voc Delay" or "Drum Rev".
To Name FX channels:
FX Masters 1-8
FX 1
Setup
FX New Verb
1001108-01-E
3
Using the FX Wizard
Less experienced users will find that the FX Wizard simplifies what can be a confusing process while skilled operators will find it to be incredibly fast. With the FX Wizard you can quickly... · Select an effect that's right for the instruments or voices you want to enhance. · Bring the instruments or voices into the effect. · Adjust the overall amount of the effect that will be heard. · Send the effect to monitors as you desire.
Select and Assign Effects (FX) Using the Wizard: Wizard
FX Wizard
FX 3
Select an effect preset. Only effects that work for the Source and Type of input you have selected will be shown. So any effect you select using the wizard will be a valid one although it may or may not work in the context of your mix Select an Effect Preset: 1. Use the Master Encoder or touch-and-drag to scroll up and down the list to see all the selections. Select one item from each list. 2. Touch Recall. The Preset is now loaded, and the name is displayed below the Type window. 3. With the Preset loaded, it's time to decide which input channels should go to the FX1 processor. Send inputs to the FX processor: 4. Buttons with the names of inputs are displayed on the Wizard Screen. Touch any button to send an input to the effect. Use the FX Master fader
to adjust the amount of effect heard in the main mix. Send the effect to monitors: 5. Is the performer going to want to hear the effect in the stage monitors or in-ear monitors? If so, it's easy to send it there. Just use the "Select
Aux Outputs (monitors) to receive:" buttons to route the effect to a monitor. 6. There are more effects available so touch one of the tabs at the top of the screen to set up more effects.
Using the Input Channel FX Tab
The FX tab on the Input Channels provides another way to select and control effects.
To access FX from an Input Channel:
In 1
FX
Once in the Channel FX screen, you can... · Go to the Effects Processor's control panel by touching a control panel icon. Press Home to come back.
· Use the sliders to control the amount of signal sent from the channel to each of the Effects Processors,
· Adjust the two most important parameters for each Effect using the "Global FX Parameters" controls. Note that any adjustment made to these controls is global and will change the Effect everywhere it is used.
Pitch Correct
To assign Pitch Correct to a channel:
Inputs 1-8
In 1
Pitch Correct
FX
Enable
The Pitch Correct Effect is somewhat different than the Reverb, Delay, Chorus and Pitch Shift Effects. Pitch Correct can only be used on one input channel at a time and there is one Pitch Correct effect. When it is assigned to a channel, it will be unassigned from any channel to which it was previously assigned.
Touch the Enable button to assign Pitch Correct to the currently selected channel.
1001108-01-E
4
Using Pitch Correct
Use the Blend control to vary the mix between corrected (wet) and uncorrected (dry) signal. 100% wet is used to correct pitch. A blend between wet and dry is used to provide a doubling effect. Use the Key control to select a musical key. This helps Pitch Correct be more accurate in determining what the intended note is. Use the Correct Rate control to adjust how quickly the pitch correction tracks.
Using the FX Channel Effect Tab
Go to the FX Channel Effect Tab (From the Input Channel FX tab):
To Access the FX Control Panel:
FX Masters 1-8
FX 1
E ect
Touch the Effect window to select the type of effect. · Chorus · Stereo Delay · Pitch Shift · Dense Reverb · Lush Reverb · Mono Delay Once an Effect is selected touch the Preset Tab. From this screen select a preset setting for the effect. Note that the setting can include EQ. Factory presets are displayed in the left-hand window. User presets may be stored and recalled using the center and right-hand windows.
To select an Effects preset:
FX Masters 1-8
FX 1
Presets
Factory Pitch-Light Detune Pitch-Medium Detune
Recall
Yes
E ect
Touch the Effect Tab to return to the Effect Processor control panel. Each type of Effect Processor displays a different control panel with parameters appropriate for the Effect. Use the FX Master fader to the right of the FX panel to adjust the amount of effect heard in the main speaker system. To adjust the level of the Effect sent to the Main L/R Output: Below the Effect control panel is the FX Returns to Monitors section. Use the sliders to set how much of the effect is sent to each auxiliary / monitor mix. If two auxiliaries have been linked, a slider and a pan control will be displayed. Above each slider is a channel label and a Mute [M] indicator.
Using the FX Overview
If you would prefer to see the send and return levels for all your effects at once, the FX overview is the place to go.
To use the FX Overview: Menu
FX Overview
1. Input channels are arranged in columns. Use the Nav Strip to select a group of Input channels. Each Input channel sends for FX Sends 14 (TouchMix-8 and TouchMix-16) and 1 6 (TouchMix-30 Pro).
2. Individual FX Mixes are arranged in horizontal rows.
3. FX Master fader The FX Master fader controls the overall output level of the FX Mix to the Main L/R outputs. Note that the FX Master does not affect the level of the Effect sent to the Aux channels.
4. Effect Processor Indicates the type of Effect currently being applied to the FX Mix.
So that's about it for effects. We worked hard on the TouchMix effects and know that they sound superb and will enhance your performances. You can dive in deep or just use the wizards, factory defaults and presets. Either way, you now have the tools for a great sounding show.
1001108-01-E
5
Mute Groups
There are many times when it is useful to mute some of the inputs and outputs. For example, you might want to mute everything but a stereo input for break music. Or there may be a part of your show when the band leaves the stage while one member does a solo number. Mute groups let you mute multiple inputs and outputs from a single button. For more information on mutes, see "Mutes" on page 19
To set up Mute Groups:
Mute Groups
Edit
Mute 1
In 1 Select channels to be assigned
To name the Mute Group: Mute Group Name MNeuwteVeJrobe
Select another Mute group to set up or touch Close Edit Close Edit to finish.
To use Mute Groups:
Mute Groups
Mute
Mute
NOTE: Mute Groups can be assigned to the User Buttons. "User Buttons" on page 24.
NOTE: When a channel is muted by a Mute Group, the channel Mute button on the Home screen looks like: Mute
DCA Groups
A DCA groups faders together so the overall level of all the channels in the group can be controlled by a single DCA fader. A DCA fader does not change the position of any of the faders in the group.
IMPORTANT: Here is an important thing to know if the DCA master fader is at 0.0 (the unity (U) mark), it does nothing to the level of an assigned channel. The DCA adds or subtracts level. Move the DCA Fader up 3 dB and everything it's assigned to will increase by 3 dB. Move it down 3 dB and well you probably figured that out. Remember that assigning or unassigning a channel to a DCA Group can cause a sudden change in the level of the channel so it's good practice to have the DCA master at 0.0 when changing assignments.
To Setup a DCA Group: wish.
DCA Groups
DCA 1
In 1
In 3 Continue selecting channels as you
You can assign inputs, outputs and FX Master faders to a DCA. If you assign an input, and the output to which it's going to the same DCA, changes you make using the DCA are doubled for the input. Raise the DCA 3 dB, the input is effectively raised 6 dB.
To Name the DCA group: DCFAXName Drums
To Mute a DCA Group:
DCA Groups
Mute
Mute
When you mute a DCA, all channels assigned to that DCA are muted. If a channel is muted by the channel Mute button, or a Mute Group, the DCA does not un-mute the channel when the DCA is un-muted.
1001108-01-E
6
Sub Groups (TouchMix-30 Pro only)
Like DCA Groups, Sub Groups are used to control the volume of multiple channels at once. However, DCA Groups simply add or subtract gain for the channels they control. No signal is routed through a DCA. Unlike DCA Groups, signal is routed through Sub Groups. This means that Sub Groups can apply processing including EQ, Limiting and even Effects to multiple channels. There are basically three ways that Sub Groups are used... · To apply common processing and level control to multiple inputs and return the processed group to the Main L/R mix.
· To route a group of inputs to an external destination such as a broadcast mix. These output groups are commonly referred to as "stems".
· To route a blend of Sub Groups to an external destination.
All eight Sub Groups appear on the Auxiliary mixes.
To output Sub Groups: Joe's Vocal
Aux 1
Sub Groups
There are two ways to assign Input Channels to Sub Groups.
From an Input Channel To assign a channel to Sub Groups:
Inputs 1-8
In 1
Setup
Sub 3
If the Sub Group is going to be sent to the Main L/R output, the channel should usually be unassigned from Main L/R. Otherwise the channel's signal will be sent directly to the Main L/R output (without any processing) and also sent to the Main L/R by way of the Sub Group. There are some advanced use cases where such a double assignment may be desirable but typically that is not the case.
From a Sub Group
To assign channels to a Sub Group:
Sub Groups
Sub 1
Setup
In 1
This will take you to the Sub Group Setup page. The lower portion of the page displays the numbers and friendly names of the input channels. Touch the button of the channels you wish to assign to the Sub Group. If the channel is assigned to the Main L/R mix, an [L/R] icon will appear by the button,
NOTE: "Remove Input Channel from L/R when assigning to Sub Group?" In the "Yes" position, assigning an input channel to a Sub Group will cause the input to be unassigned from the Main L/R. In the "No" position, assigning a channel to a sub group will have no effect on the channel's Main L/R assignment.
1001108-01-E
7
Using Auxiliaries as Sub Groups (TouchMix-8 and 16 only)
The Auxiliary mixes may be assigned to the Main L/R output allowing the auxiliaries to function as sub groups. This feature is intended for use with the input channel "Assign To Main L/R" function.
To use an Auxiliary channel as a Sub Group (for this example, we are assigning In Channel 1 to Aux 5 Sub Group):
Aux Masters
1.
Aux 5
Setup
Main L/R Post Fader
2.
Inputs 1-8
In 1
Auxes
Adjust Aux send 5 to 0*
*Adjusting the Aux Send 5 to 0 adds the Input Channel 1 to the Sub Group.
Setup
Main L/R
3. Repeat Step 2 for all the input channels that are part of the Sub Group.
4. The channel faders Aux Master (Aux 5) now functions as a Sub Group Master.
Matrix Mixing
To understand a matrix, it's first useful to understand the concept of a sub-mix (sometimes called a "stem"). As the name implies, a sub-mix is a mix consisting of some subset of all the mixer's inputs. For example there could be sub-mixes consisting of all the violins, or the choir, or drums, or delegate microphones or sound effects. If you've got all of these at once you've got a really interesting production but we digress. A matrix simply lets you blend these sub-mixes (stems) into a single mix.
A stem can be created by assigning inputs to a Sub-Group or by sending them to an Auxiliary. Now that we've got the stems, what do we do with them? On the TouchMix-30 Pro, Auxiliaries 9 14 also function as mix matrices. In addition to all the input channels, these signals may be sent to Auxiliaries 9 14...
In 1 Kick In 2 Snare In 3 Overhead In 4 Overhead
Sub Group 1 Drums
In 5 Lead Guitar In 6 Rhythm Guitar
Sub Group 2 Guitars
In 7 Piano In 6 Organ
Sub Group 3 Keyboards
In 9 Lead Vocal In 10 Backing 1 In 11 Backing 2
Sub Group 4 Vocals
Sub Groups' Aux 1 Sends
Sub 1 Fader
Sub 1 Fader Sub 1 Fader
Sub 1 Fader
Main Out Aux Out
· Main L/R
· Auxiliaries 1 8
· Sub-Groups 1 8
All of these stems can be mixed as needed and routed out via Auxiliaries 9 14. The application may be as simple as just sending a mono mix of the Main L/R to an overflow area or as complex as creating a separate broadcast mix from 8 or more stems. In addition, all the inputs are available on Auxiliaries 9 14 so it's possible to mix in the signal from one or more input channels.
1001108-01-E
8
Save Your Work as a Scene
You've put some effort into setting up your mix so now would be a great time to save it. A Scene is a snapshot of all the settings on the mixer.
TIP: It's a good idea to save your scene with the outputs muted or levels down. Why? Because it's possible that the gain settings on power amplifiers or powered loudspeakers have changed since the scene was saved. Recalling the scene could result in a blast of feedback from all the speakers connected to the mixer.
To Save Your Scene: Menu
Scenes
Save/Save As
Save Scene To Name Your Scene: As:
Saturday Night
Storage Location
To Save Your Scene:
Mixer
USB
Save
Sound Check
Before connecting anything, plug in your TouchMix and make sure that all the inputs and Auxiliary Outputs are muted. This will prevent uncontrolled feedback if a microphone is patched into a hot channel.
Inputs 1-8
Inputs 9-16
Inputs 17-24
Stereo In/2-Trk
Aux Masters
Aux Out 9-14
To Mute Channels:
Mute
Mute
Mute
Mute
Mute
Mute
Mute
Mute
Mute
Mute
Mute
Mute
In each of the groups of faders, press the Mute button for each channel. Now you can connect the mixer to sources and speaker systems.
Using TouchMix with QSC Amplifiers and Loudspeakers
If you're using QSC E, K, K.2, KW or KLA loudspeakers or GXD amplifiers your TouchMix can recommended input level settings to help optimize your system gain structure as well as offering output presets for different applications.
For Main L/R:
Main
Setup
Select an amplifier or loudspeaker series.
For Aux outputs:
Aux Masters
Aux 1
Setup
Loudspeaker Gain and Preset Pop-up
In addition to displaying the recommended input gain setting (1) for the selected loudspeaker (2), the pop-up displays a choice of presets (3) for the loudspeaker. For most QSC loudspeaker there are options that optimize the loudspeaker for live sound reinforcement, stage monitor use or dance music playback.
In the pop-up all you need to do is:
1. Touch the button associated with your loudspeaker, or amplifier 2. Adjust your equipment as instructed
3. Select the preset you want to use with your loudspeakers
4. Touch Recall Preset.
1001108-01-E
9
Select an amplifier or loudspeaker series.
Select QSC Speaker Model and Preset Name to display Gain Settings or Recall a Preset
2 Model K8.2
3 Preset Name Dance
K10.2
0dB
K10.2 K12.2
Floor Monitor Live Bright
Live
Studio
1
Vocal Monitor
OFF
+10dB
GAIN
Done
Recall Preset
Rotate Gain knob 5 detents (clicks) past zero.
These settings give you the optimum signal to noise performance and get the most from your QSC loudspeakers or amplifier. The mixer's output meters will reflect when you're "running out of speaker". Note that you will see the "Limit" light on your speakers illuminate as the mixer drives them harder during louder portions. This is normal and is just the speaker's internal DSP doing its job.
Select a QSC Loudspeaker Preset
The GXD amplifier and K.2 Series loudspeakers both have presets for various applications. The TouchMix mixers have the same presets . Make sure you use only one or the other. Do not use the TouchMix presets if you have presets set up in the GXD or the K.2 loudspeakers, and vice versa.
E-Series QSC's GXD series amplifiers include voices for QSC E-Series loudspeakers. If you are using any other amplifier, E-Series voices may be applied by the TouchMix. Be certain that any equalization in the amplifiers you are using is bypassed or set to flat.
K.2 Series The K.2 presets may also be recalled from the channel Preset screen. These settings are identical to those available from the Gain and Preset Pop-up. These are identical to the factory presets in the K.2 loudspeakers. Simply set your K.2 speakers to the factory default setting and leave it there. The mixer will now supply the preset.
To recall a Loudspeaker Preset:
For Main L/R:
Main
Presets
Select Series > Select Model > Select Preset > Recall.
For Aux outputs:
Aux Masters
Aux 1
Presets
Select Series > Select Model > Select Preset > Recall.
QSC GXD Amplifier Settings
If you are using a QSC GXD amplifier, you can optimize the gain and sensitivity for use with your TouchMix. See "Output Channel GXD Amp Settings" on page 59
Phantom Power (+48V)
Most condenser microphones and some direct boxes require phantom power from the mixer. On TouchMix mixers, phantom power may be turned on or off on a per channel basis. Make sure that phantom power is on for those channels that need it and off for those that don't. It's a good practice to keep Phantom Power turned off when making connections in order to avoid the inevitible loud pops that will occur.
To Enable or Disable Phantom Power (+48V):
Mic 48V
Phantom power is also accessible from the channel Setup screens.
21
20
+48 V
In 21 In 20
To Exit
Work on Your Inputs
Ask the performers in turn to do what they do to make their audio contribution to the performance. Without un-muting their channels, bring the channel's input gain Trim up while watching the channel meter on the Home screen. What you are looking for is a meter that is bouncing around the 0 mark when the performer is producing a normal output level.
TIP: During sound check performers will usually not play as loudly as they do in an actual performance so keep this in mind and allow a little extra headroom.
Acceptable
Not Acceptable
000
0
With the performer performing, un-mute the channel and bring the fader up until the desired performance level is reached.
If you are using one of the internal channel presets, this channel should already be sounding good. If it's not what you're looking for, try some of the other preset choices. For most instruments and musical styles, there will be a preset that works well. If not, you'll need to dive into the channel and dial it in manually.
To Adjust Channel Parameters:
Inputs 1-8
In 1
At the top of the screen, select the tab for the channel processing element you want to work on.
1001108-01-E
10
Simple and Advanced Mode
TouchMix mixers offer two modes of operation: · Simple Mode Presents the user with a reduced set of controls. It's important to know that switching into Simple mode does not alter the
values of any Advanced-mode controls.
· Advanced Mode Presents all mixer controls to the user.
You can select Simple and Advanced modes individually for an EQ, Gate, Compressor or Effect. Note that the Stereo and Mono Delays do not have a Simple mode. Look for the Simple button on the screen. Or you can make the selection globally.
To Globally Select Simple / Advanced Mode: Menu
Simple OR Advanced
Auxiliary (Stage Monitor) Mixes
There are two general approaches to setting up stage monitor mixes:
Input by Input
With all the performers on stage, ask each performer in turn to play or sing just one thing (Kick, Snare, Guitar, Sax, etc). Ask each performer how much of that instrument they want in their monitor. Our guess is that they will all say "that's plenty" during sound check and then ask for lots more after the first song just sayin'.
To Set Up Monitor Mixes One Input at a Time:
Inputs 1-8
In 1
Auxes
You will see sliders representing the send levels of the input to all the aux mixes. If any auxes are linked for stereo, the linked pair will have a Level control and a Pan control.
Adjust -40
-20
-10
U
10 for each performer in turn then use the
buttons to move through the channels.
Prev Next
Mix On Faders
Sometimes it's preferable to set up a complete mix for one auxiliary output at a time. On the left side of the mixer's screen you will find buttons that directly access the Auxiliary mixes. Touch one of the Auxiliary Select buttons to go to the mix you want to work on. Use the faders to adjust the sends to the selected Aux Mix. Use the Nav Strip to move between fader banks.
Note that you can Mute an individual channel in an Auxiliary mix without muting it anywhere else.
TIP: There are times when several mixes will be similar to each other. To speed set-up, refer to "Copy & Paste" on page 20.
Output Processing
Like the input channels, the outputs (Main L/R and Aux Outputs) have their own processing.
To access Main Output Processing:
Main
To access Auxiliary Output Processing:
Aux Masters
Aux Out 9-14
Each output includes a full complement of processing and other functions including:
Aux 1
1001108-01-E
11
Overview Tab
Overview
Displays an overview of the output channel settings including Delay, DCA and Mute Group Assigns, Pre/Post pick-off points (auxiliaries only), Aux Send Levels (see Matrix Mixing).
PEQ Tab
PEQ
Six-band parametric EQ with High / Low-Cut filters and a Real Time Analyzer (RTA) This tab displays the six-band, parametric equalizer plus the Low and High-Cut Filters. The 6 bands of parametric EQ can be individually bypassed using the numbered buttons. Bands 1 and 6 may be switched from parametric to shelving operation. You can use the two-finger pinch / zoom gesture to adjust the Q for the selected Band.
Touch the RTA On button to activate / deactivate a Real Time Analyzer display for the channel. ("Real-time Analyzer (RTA)" on page 102).
NOTE: When the RTA is not enabled, the Parametric EQ screen is enlarged to occupy both the RTA and PEQ screen area.
Low-Cut / High-Cut filters These filters are used to roll off high or low frequency content. There are a number of possible applications. · For stage monitors, it is common to roll off low frequencies at 80 100 Hz. There is usually ample low frequency energy on stage without any
help from the monitors. Keeping it out of the monitors can reduce "rumble" on stage and in the house.
· For speech only systems, rolling off low frequencies can reduce microphone handling noise or, if outdoors wind noise.
· Fill speakers may not need any additional low-frequency energy as there is ample bottom end coming from subwoofers.
· There is a technique known as "subs on auxes" in which the subwoofer is fed from one of the auxes while the main speakers are fed from the mixer's main outputs. Only those instruments that contain low-frequencies are sent to the subwoofer. This provides more control over the lows and can help keep the bottom end tighter. If this is being done, the Low and High-Cut filters could be used to set the crossover point between subs and main speakers.
GEQ Tab
GEQ
One-third octave graphic equalizer with an RTA
In addition to the Real Time Analyzer (RTA), this tab displays two, overlaid 1/3 octave graphic equalizers.
· GEQ: The solid faders [Insert Image] control the user adjustable graphic equalizer. The "GEQ" switch may be used to bypass (Out) or activate (In) this equalizer. The "Reset" button will return the GEQ sliders to 0.
· Tuning Wizard EQ: If the "Tuning" switch is set to "In" a set of `ghost' faders (1) is displayed to indicate the settings resulting from adjustment by the Room Tuning Wizard (See "Room Tuning Wizard" on page 22). The `ghost' faders are indicators only and are not adjustable.
The GEQ and the Tuning Wizard EQ are additive. So 3 dB boost from the Tuning
1
Wizard and a 2 dB boost from the GEQ at the same frequency will result in a 5 dB
total boost.
Touch the RTA On button to activate / deactivate a Real Time Analyzer display for the channel. "Real Time Analyzer (RTA)" on page 18
1001108-01-E
12
Touch the Tuning Wizard button to go to the Room Tuning Wizard screen.
Anti-Feedback Tab
AntiFeedback
Anti-Feedback Wizard and Manual operation The Anti-Feedback system automatically identifies and displays suspected feedback frequencies. When a suspected feedback frequency is identified, a single touch applies a filter at that frequency. In addition a Feedback Wizard can assist in finding and cutting feedback-prone frequencies.
Limiter Tab
Limiter
Displays the limiter and its controls. We strongly encourage the use of the limiter for In Ear Monitors.
Auxes Tab (TouchMix-30 Pro only)
Auxes
The Main L/R outputs may be returned to Auxiliary mixes 1 14. Auxiliary mixes 9 -14 may be returned to Auxiliary mixes 1 8. Refer to "Patch Matrix (TouchMix-30 Pro only)" on page 21 for more information.
Presets Tab
Presets
Preset save/recall This tab offers a Factory Preset named Reset that returns all output control parameters to their factory values. In addition, any settings you make can be stored to and recalled from either internal or external (USB) memory. The Preset Tab also includes factory voicings for QSC E-Series and K.2 Series loudspeakers. These settings are also available for QSC PLD and GXD amplifiers. The E-Series voicings are intended for use with other amplifiers that lack DSP. An "X" suffix after the preset name indicates the preset is intended for use with a sub-woofer. Do not use the mixer presets and the PLD or GXD voicings together your E-Series speakers will not sound twice as good.
Setup Tab
Setup
The Setup Tab includes the following utility functions for the output. Rename Aux Joe's Monitor Touch the field to enter a name for the output (not available on Main output).
Linking Link This Links odd-to-even pairs of auxiliary mixes to create a stereo mix.
Delay
Delay is most commonly used for remote fill speakers. The objective is to set the delay so that
In
the sound from the primary system arrives at the listeners ears just slightly (20 30 msec)
ahead of the sound from the fill system. When done correctly, the listeners perceive the sound
as coming from the primary system even though most of what they hear is from the fill speakers.
In venues with very deep stages, the engineer will sometimes delay the house system so that
it time aligns with the back-line. In other words, set up the system so that the sound from the
actual kick drum and the reinforced kick drum arrive at the listeners' ears at the same time. The
1001108-01-E
13
Units
55.0
feet
Delay
48.9
ms
16.8
meters
delay provides a read out in msecs. (up to 100), meters (up to 34.3) and feet (up to 113).
Channel Safe During Scene Recall
When a Scene is recalled, it sets all the controls to the settings saved with the Scene. There may be times you do not want to change a specific output channel, or channels. The default position, Recallable, allows the scene to recall the saved settings. The Safe position does not allow the scene to change any settings of this channel.
Channel Safe Channel Safe
During Scene Recall During Scene Recall
Recallable
Safe
QSC Amplifier and Speaker Settings: Ampli ers E Series K Series K.2 Series KLA Series KW Series
Refer to "Using TouchMix with QSC Amplifiers and Loudspeakers" on page 9 and "QSC GXD Amplifier Settings" on page 10. Also see "What is a Channel Preset?" on page 2 for information on preset voices for QSC E-Series loudspeakers.
Aux Pick-off Pre Fader Post Fader Pre Dynamics Pre All
Available for the Aux mixes only, these buttons determine whether the point from which the signal is taken is before or after the channel fader. For most monitor mixing applications, this should be set to Pre Fader. Assignments DCA 1 Mute 1
These buttons assign the output to a Mute Group or a DCA Group. Refer to "Mute Groups" on page 6 and "DCA Groups" on page 6 for details.
Recording
TouchMix mixers make it easier than ever to capture a live performance in a stereo or a multi-track recording. All you need is a USB hard-drive.
NOTE: Hard-drive requirements A list of hard-drives that QSC has qualified may be found at qsc.com. There are far too many hard-drives available for us to test them all so there are certainly many unlisted drives that will work well with TouchMix. Higher speed drives (>7200 RPM) tend to work best. Some higher speed drives don't do their best when powered from the USB port but will work when used with an external power supply. We have also had very good luck with solid state drives. USB thumb-drives may work for recording a small number of channels but are not recommended although users report good results with better quality, USB 3.0 thumb drives.
Formatting the drive The drive must be formatted as FAT 32 and de-fragmentation improves seek time. If formatting the drive from an Apple Mac computer select MS-DOS (FAT) as the Format and MBR (Master Boot Record) as the scheme. The TouchMix mixer can also format a drive. The format function is available from the Recording Setup screen. Drive space for recording Be sure that there is sufficient space on the drive for your recording. To calculate the space required for your recording... · For 48 kHz Space required (in MB) = 11.5 x minutes x tracks · For 44.1 kHz Space required (in MB) = 10.6 x minutes x tracks It is good practice to have more disk space available than you need. If the drive is nearly full, TouchMix has to look for nooks and crannies of available space. This will result in fragmented wave files and potential loss of audio data and synchronization across tracks. At approximately 3 hours of non-stop recording, the maximum file size supported by FAT32 is exceeded. To avoid problems, stop and then resume recording. It is not necessary to create a new session. The TouchMix displays a pop-up that warns you when this limit is approaching. If you do exceed the FAT32 limit, track synchronization may be lost.
NOTE: Depending on the number of tracks recorded and the performance of the hard drive, multi-track playback may slow down the rendering of objects on the mixer screen resulting in lagging display of control movement.
1001108-01-E
14
Transferring tracks between TouchMix and DAW
A utility application TouchMix DAW Utility - that facilitates transferring tracks between TouchMix mixers and Digital Audio Workstations is available for download at www.qsc.com. The application runs on Mac or Windows computers. Sample Rate In general, use 44.1 kHz for CD projects, and 48 kHz for video projects. Do not change sample rate while recording.
To View or Change Sample Rate: Menu
Mixer Setup
Sample Rate 44.1 kHz
48 kHz
Multi-Track Recording All TouchMix models are capable of recording all audio inputs plus a stereo mix directly to a USB hard-drive (see above). The audio is captures as a 32-bit, floating point wave file. Recording and Playback Capacity · TouchMix-30 Pro: 32 tracks (30 inputs + stereo mix) · TouchMix-16: 22 tracks (20 inputs + stereo mix) · TouchMix-8: 14 tracks (12 inputs + stereo mix) Connect a hard-drive (see above) to one of the USB inputs of the mixer.
Set the External Recording & Playback Mode to Multitrack:
Rec/ Play
Recording Mode
Stereo MP3 Multitrack
USB Drive Playback
USB Drive
Multitrack
DAW
To create a recording session:
Rec/ Play
To select channels to record:
Rec/ Play
Recording Setup
New Session
Enter a name
Create
Inputs 1-8
Inputs 9-16
And/Or
Inputs 17-24
Stereo In/2-Trk
And/Or
And/Or
Touch Arm for each channel you want to record.
Once all the channels you wish to record have been armed, touch (Record Button) to begin recording. Touch the (Stop) button to end recording.
NOTE: User buttons may be assigned to Arm / Disarm and select Track or Input as the source for all channels at once. "User Buttons" on page 24
IMPORTANT: Do not unplug your TouchMix until you have stopped recording! If you do, your recorded tracks will not be usable. You must end the Session by touching the STOP button on the transport control. Doing so writes a header file that is needed in order to play back the recording or import it into a DAW.
The TouchMix mixers permit over-dubs, however only the last recorded track will play back on the mixer. Earlier passes are left on the drive and may be imported into a DAW.
1001108-01-E
15
Multi-Track Playback & Mix Down
Tracks recorded on the TouchMix mixers may be played back and mixed down on the mixer.
To load a recorded Session:
Rec/ Play
Recording Setup
USB Session
Vocal 1 - Joe Backup Voc 1 Guitar Acoustic 1
Recall
A list of available recordings is displayed. Select the recording you want to play and touch Recall. Now that the session is loaded, the next step is to switch the input channel source to "Track".
To select Track as the input source:
Rec/ Play
Inputs 1-8
And/Or
Inputs 9-16
Inputs 17-24
Stereo In/2-Trk
And/Or
And/Or
Touch Track for each channel you want to play back.
Use the Locator bar at the bottom of the Rec / Play screen to set the starting point for recording.
Mix Down
There are three ways to mix down your multi-track recording. · Import the multi-track waves into a DAW (digital audio workstation). See "Transferring Tracks between TouchMix and DAW" above. · Record the mixer's analog output to an external 2-track recorder. Simply connect the TouchMix Main L/R outputs to the inputs of your 2-track
device. · Record a stereo mix to DAW via the USB DAW connection (TouchMix-30 Pro only). · Internal mix down to 2-track. To mix down to 2-track: 1. Recall the session and set up the mixer for Playback as described above.
2. From the Record/Play Screen:
Stereo In/2-Trk
2-Trk Rec
Main L/R
If you would like to use the Main L/R channel processing on the stereo mix, select Post , if not, select Pre . Touch Arm .
Return to the Rec / Play screen and touch to begin mix down. When you are finished, touch on the transport controls. What to do with the 2-track mix down? · Export to a DAW for further processing and to be edited into individual songs. The wave files may be found in the last two folders of the directory
containing the session.
· TouchMix-30 Pro only Create an MP3 version from the mixer. The TouchMix-30 Pro has the capability of rendering the 2-track mix as an MP3 file.
To make an MP3 version of Tracks 31/32:
Stereo In/2-Trk
2-Trk Rec
Export 2-track
The MP3 audio file will be saved to the "\<session name>.tmRecord\exports" directory.
DAW Interface
The TouchMix-30 Pro is capable of interfacing to Mac OSX computers with Core Audio. Core Audio was introduced with OSX version 10.3. The mixer must be connected to the computer using a USB type-B connector attached to the "USB DAW" port of the mixer. To verify that your Mac is connected, open the Audio MIDI Setup utility on the computer (Finder > Applications > Utilities > Audio MIDI Setup). "QSC TM30 Pro" will appear in the Audio Devices window. Select the mixer and make sure that the sample rate on the Mac matches that of the Mixer.
To View or Change Sample Rate: Menu
Mixer Setup
Sample Rate 44.1 kHz
48 kHz
1001108-01-E
16
Your DAW software will also likely require some configuration to connect with the TouchMix-30 Pro. See your DAW software documentation for information on this topic. There is also a guide to configuration of some common DAW software at www.qsc.com.
NOTE: User buttons may be assigned to Arm / Disarm and select Track or Input as the source for all channels at once. "User Buttons" on page 24
Anti-Feedback System
The TouchMix-30 Pro includes twelve narrow-band, anti-feedback filters on each output (eight filters for TouchMix-8 and TouchMix-16). These filters are extremely useful for eliminating feedback frequencies while having very little effect on overall tonal balance. The filters may be adjusted manually or automatically using the "Feedback Wizard" (see below).
Manually Ringing Out a System
In order to identify feedback frequencies, it's necessary to deliberately make the system feedback. This process is known is "ringing out" or "squeaking" the system. Here's how an experienced sound system operator would go about it. · Bring all mixer output faders to minimum · Place all microphones and speakers in position · Bring the input level of power amplifiers or powered speakers to the level that will be used in performance. · Bring the input gain and channel faders for the mix you're working on to the approximate level they will be at during the performance. · Warn anybody who is around that you are going to make some unpleasant noises. · Slowly and carefully bring up the fader for the output you are working on until the system begins to feedback.
· Be prepared to quickly back down the fader if the feedback really starts "taking off". · It may be necessary to have someone talk or shout into a microphone to "excite" the system into feedback. · Adjust the frequency of a filter to match the feedback frequency and reduce the gain until the feedback goes away. · Repeat until you have achieved sufficient system gain without feedback.
Using the Feedback Wizard
The tricky part is to identify the feedback frequencies. Fortunately, you don't need to identify them because your TouchMix has built-in tools to do that for you. Here's how to use those tools. To access the Anti-Feedback System:
Aux Masters
Aux 1
AntiFeedback
Feedback Wizard
OR
AnitFeedback
Pre-Feedback Wizard Checklist:
· Microphones and loudspeakers in their performance positions.
· Input channel gain and level settings approximately at performance levels.
· Zero the filter bands or touch Reset. The Wizard won't use a filter unless its gain is set to 0.0 dB Cut.
· Output you're working with set at a level that's slightly below its threshold of feedback.
· If the space is very quiet, turn on some noise using the control in the Feedback Wizard.
· The Wizard will cause feedback to occur briefly at levels that may be uncomfortable to those who are sensitive to such things. Let them know it's coming.
Follow the step-by-step instructions on the screen. The Feedback Wizard gradually brings up the Master Fader. As it does, feedback ring frequencies will emerge. The Feedback Wizard will identify the frequency and automatically apply a notch filter. You may continue the process until the Feedback Wizard has used up all Anti-Feedback Filters or you may touch "Done" or "Anti-Feedback Wizard" at any point. Typically, eliminating five or six feedback frequencies should be sufficient.
1001108-01-E
17
Licensed to Kill Feedback
The Feedback Wizard algorithm is looking for suspected feedback frequencies even when the Wizard isn't active. The most recently identified
suspect frequency is displayed in the "Feedback Frequency" window. Simply touch the Manual button and an Anti-Feedback Filter will be
applied to the frequency.
Kill
Lingering Feedback Problems
If you have used the Wizard or Manual Kill function to apply all anti-feedback filters and your system is still unstable (prone to feedback) there are several other possibilities...
· Improper microphone selection or placement. · Improper microphone technique.
· The performer is cupping the head of the microphone because he's seen the cool guys on videos do it. This actually turns a directional microphone into an omni-directional microphone and destroys any off-axis feedback rejection the microphone has.
· Or an inexperienced talker is holding a hand-held microphone at chest level while pacing in front of the speakers. · Improper loudspeaker selection or placement. · Unrealistic expectations. If you point a microphone at a loudspeaker and increase the gain enough, it will eventually feed back. · Excessive EQ boost elsewhere in the signal chain. · Compressor latch
More about the Anti-Feedback System
At the bottom of the Anti-Feedback screen is a "Filter Depth" control. This can be used to vary the depth of all the Anti-Feedback Filters.
The Feedback Wizard and Manual Kill function will not readjust a filter that has already been set. They will only use an Anti-Feedback Filter that is set to 0.0 dB Cut. If all twelve filters are already in use neither function will have any effect. To make an Anti-Feedback Filter available for the Wizard or Manual Kill function, simply rotate the gain of a filter to 0.0 dB or touch the "Reset" button to zero all filters (be careful when you do this because you may be removing the filters that have been preventing feedback).
Filters are applied in the order that feedback frequencies are identified and do not correlate to the left to right arrangement of the controls. This means that Filter 1 could be applied to a high-frequency while Filter 12 is applied to a very low frequency. The filter controls and on-screen indicators are numbered and color-coded for easy identification.
There are anti-feedback systems that actively search for and filter feedback in real-time during performance and they can be quite effective for speech applications. These systems can struggle with music because it's difficult to tell the difference between unwanted sound system feedback and desired electric guitar feedback or a sustained note on an organ or synthesizer.
Real Time Analyzer (RTA)
An audio Real Time Analyzer breaks the spectrum into frequency bands 1/3 octave bands for the TouchMix RTA and displays the amplitude of the signal in each band. It is useful for visualizing the frequency balance of a signal and for identifying feedback frequencies.
TIP: The TouchMix mixers also include a noise generator. Some may attempt to use the noise generator, output EQ and RTA to "tune" the system for "flat" response. This is an overly simplistic approach to system tuning and will rarely if ever deliver the desired results. In addition, the prolonged output of noise can stress loudspeakers and annoy others. Please see "Tuning Wizard" for a more useful approach to dialing in your rig.
The TouchMix contains two 31-band, Real Time Analyzers. These may be displayed on any combination of the mixer and tablet devices but only two RTA are available at one time. If an operator attempts to open a 3rd instance of the RTA, a confirmation prompt will appear.
One RTA (the Channel RTA) is available on all input and output EQ screens and may be displayed by touching the "RTA On" button located above the EQ / RTA window.
NOTE: When the RTA is not enabled, the Parametric EQ screen is enlarged to occupy both the RTA and PEQ screen area.
The second RTA (the Independent RTA) can be displayed by pushing the RTA button on the mixer or touching the RTA button on the remote control app. This RTA offers options for source selection. The user may select... · The Main L/R signal · The signal from any Auxiliary mix · The Talkback microphone input · Follow Cue (whatever is heard in the Cue bus is displayed on the RTA)
NOTE: The TouchMix-8 and TouchMix-16 RTA is similar in operation but only a single RTA is available.
1001108-01-E
18
Mutes
The TouchMix has a sophisticated and powerful Mute system. In addition to the Mute Groups (See "Mute Groups" on page 6) inputs and individual channel sends to individual aux mixes may be muted independently. Main Mutes: When a channel is muted while the Main L/R is selected, the channel is also muted to all Auxiliary and FX mixes. This is true whether the channel was muted using the channel Mute button or a Mute Group. Auxiliary Mutes: It is sometimes useful to mute an individual input to only one auxiliary mix. When an Auxiliary is selected by touching one of the buttons on the left of the screen, the Mute button that is displayed with the channel faders will effect only the selected auxiliary mix. The Mute buttons have three states...
· Mute : Indicates the channel is not muted.
· Mute : »» With Main L/R mix selected, indicates that the channel has been muted by pressing the channel Mute button. The channel's signal is also muted for all auxiliary sends. »» With Auxiliary mix selected, indicates that the channel is muted for the currently selected Auxiliary mix. This affects only the muted channel and only for the selected Aux mix.
· Mute : This is an indication that the channel is muted by something other than the Mute button you're seeing.
»» With Main L/R mix selected, indicates that the channel is muted from a Mute Group, or DCA Group*. »» With Auxiliary mix selected, indicates that the channel is muted from a Mute Group, DCA Group or at the Main L/R
mix. »» For FX Returns, indicates that the channel is muted from a Mute Group, DCA Group or FX Mute button
NOTE: *A DCA mute will not mute an auxiliary send that is set to a pre-fader pick-off point.
1001108-01-E
19
Copy & Paste
The TouchMix-30 Pro has a powerful but simple copy and paste function that is operated by the U7 (copy) and U8 (paste) buttons (U2 and U3 on the TouchMix-8 and TouchMix-16). Copy and Paste is context sensitive so that what you are looking at is what will be copied. Only like things may be copied and pasted from and to each other. For example, a PEQ cannot be pasted to a GEQ. The table below explains what parameters will be copied and pasted.
NOTE: The copy buffer retains the last item of each type that has been copied. If, for example a GEQ setting is copied and then a Gate is copied, both will reside in memory. If a GEQ is displayed, Paste will recall the copied GEQ parameters. If a Gate is displayed, Gate parameters will be pasted.
To copy and paste parameters:
Aux Masters
Aux 1
Copy
Paste
U7
Aux 5
U8
The example above shows the mix that's on Auxiliary 1 copied to Auxiliary 5.
After set-up is complete, it may be useful to clear the Copy/Paste buffer. This will prevent accidentally pasting parameters during the show. To clear the Copy/Paste memory:
To clear the Copy/Paste buffer: Menu
Clear Copy/Paste
Yes
What's Displayed Main or Auxiliary Faders View Input Channel Overview Tab
Input Channel EQ Tab Input Channel Comp Tab Input Channel Gate Tab Input Channel FX Tab Input Channel Aux Tab Input Channel Setup Tab Output Channel Overview Tab
Output Channel PEQ Tab Output Channel GEQ Tab Output Channel Anti-Feedback Tab Output Channel Limiter Tab Output Channel FX Tab Output Channel Aux Tab Output Channel Setup Tab FX Channel Overview Tab FX Channel EQ Tab FX Channel Preset Tab FX Channel Aux Tab Sub Group Overview Tab Sub Group EQ Tab Sub Group Limiter Tab Sub Group FX Tab Sub Group Aux Tab
What will be copied & pasted Fader and Pan EQ, Compressor, Gate, FX sends, Aux Sends, Digital Gain, Delay, Group Assigns, Polarity All channel EQ parameters All channel Compressor parameters All channel Gate parameters All channel FX send levels All channel Auxiliary Send levels and Pan positions Recording Arm, Polarity, Delay, Digital Gain, Group assignments PEQ, Limiter, FX sends, Aux Sends, Delay, Group Assigns, Polarity, PickOff Point (Auxes only) All channel PEQ parameters All channel GEQ parameters All channel Anti-feedback parameters All channel Limiter parameters All channel FX send levels All channel Auxiliary Send levels and Pan positions Recording Arm, Polarity, Delay, Digital Gain, Group assignments Current Preset, EQ, Pick-Off Point, Group Assigns, Polarity All FX channel EQ parameters Processor and Preset selection, FX Returns and Pans to Aux All FX Channel Auxiliary Send levels and Pan positions PEQ, Limiter, FX sends, Aux Sends, Group Assigns All Sub Group PEQ parameters All Sub Group Limiter parameters All Sub Group FX send levels All Sub Group Auxiliary Send levels and Pan positions
1001108-01-E
20
Patch Matrix (TouchMix-30 Pro only)
The Patch Matrix is a powerful tool but it is also one that can create problems. Make sure you clearly understand this function before attempting to use it.
The TouchMix-30 Pro has audio inputs plus a set of graphical controls and processing for each audio channel. Let's call these "Inputs" and "Channels". By default, the audio for Input 1 is controlled and processed by Channel 1, Input 2 is controlled and processed by Channel 2 and..., well you get the idea.
There are occasions when it is useful to route an Input to an alternate Channel. Before you do, there are a few things to understand.
· The Patch Matrix only effects the digital audio signal. So rerouting Input 1 to Channel 6 does not change the fact that input gain trim still has to be set using the Trim 1 control.
· Unless you keep track of the changes you've made, altering the default patching can make signal tracing confusing. You know the microphone is connected to Input 1 but why isn't there any signal showing up on Channel 1?
That said, there are some reasons to use the Patch Matrix. The first is simply to rearrange the order in which inputs appear on the controls. Before making a change on the Patch Matrix, ask yourself if it wouldn't be easier and potentially less confusing to physically re-patch the input. If the answer is no, here's how to proceed.
To access the Patch Matrix: Menu
Patch Matrix
NOTE: When the Patch Matrix is loaded for the first time after the mixer was powered on, it may take a few moments to display. The Patch Matrix displays the Analog Inputs across the top of the screen and the Destination Channels down the right side. Connection is indicated with lines and a blue circle.
To change a connection:
·
Touch the button of the
Input 5
you want to
re-patch. The button changes
. Input 5
· Touch the Channel 8 In 8
where you want to route the input.
»» The Channel changes to 8 In 5 , the lines and blue circle move to indicate the new routing.
· To route the input to a second Channel, touch 11 In 5 input.
of the second Channel to which you want to route the
· If you make a mistake in selecting a Channel, simply touch it again to restore the previous routing.
· Touch the input button to complete the re-patch.
TIP: Why would one want to route the same input to two Channels? This is known as "Multing". The term comes from old-school analog patch bays that had some jacks wired so that a single signal could be patched to multiple destinations. Here's an example of how it's used. Let's say you've got an acoustic guitar on stage and you've dialed it in for the main speaker system. But no matter what you do, you can't get it to sound right in the monitors without compromising the sound the audience hears. You could use an XLR Y-Cable to patch the guitar into two mixer channels, or you could use the Patch Matrix to mult the guitar to a second Channel. Send that channel only to the performer's stage monitor and adjust as needed to make our demanding guitarist happy.
To reset the Patch Matrix to default routing: Menu
Patch Matrix
Reset
Reset
Patch Matrix settings may also be saved and recalled using the Save / Recall button.
1001108-01-E
21
Room Tuning Wizard
The Tuning Wizard assists the operator in adjusting an output equalizer to compensate for variations in room acoustics and loudspeaker response. The three TouchMix models handle measurement microphone connection in slightly differing ways.
TouchMix-30 Pro
The measurement microphone is connected to the Talkback input and is controlled entirely from within the Room Tuning Wizard.
TouchMix-8 or TouchMix-16
For these mixers the microphone is connected to input 8 (TouchMix-8) or input 16 (TouchMix-16). When the Room Tuning Wizard is opened, channel 8 (or 16) is automatically muted and its input signal is routed to the Room Tuning Wizard. The measurement microphone may then be connected to input 8 (or 16) and the Room Tuning process may be run. Upon completion, the input channel is muted to allow disconnection of the measurement microphone and re-connection of the instrument previously connected. The input 8 (or 16) channel mute can then be lifted by the operator. The Room Tuning Wizard has no effect on the input channel settings.
Before proceeding with the Tuning Wizard, listen to your system in the room using material with which you are familiar. Many contemporary loudspeaker systems especially powered loudspeakers such as the QSC K.2, K, KW and KLA series have been carefully tuned by design and will sound very good with little or no additional equalization. That said, here's how to use the Room Tuning Wizard. Before you begin, you will need a measurement microphone with flat response, a microphone stand and a microphone cable that's long enough to reach from the mixer to the coverage area of the speakers being measured. When using the Room Tuning Wizard, it's best to do so before applying any of the output channel's parametric EQ or Anti-Feedback filters.
To access the Room Tuning Wizard: Wizard
Tuning Wizard
OR
Aux Masters
Aux 1
GEQ
Tuning Wizard
3. Select an output to tune Aux 2
4. Select a measurement method. Low Precision (Fast)
OR Medium Precision OR
High Precision
OR Skip Measurement (Use Previous)
NOTE: The Low Precision method uses just a single measurement while the Medium and High Precision methods require multiple measurements and repositioning of the microphone. The Skip Measurement method will retain the results of the last measurement but allow selection of one of the other target tuning curves that we'll discuss in a moment.
5. Touch Next . The wizard displays instructions and a guide to microphone placement.
NOTE: Most measurement microphones are condenser microphones and require phantom power which may be switched on from the Room Tuning Wizard screen.
6. Enable Talkback Mic Phantom O
On if needed.
7. Touch Begin .
1001108-01-E
22
8.
Follow the directions and adjust the
Noise Level
-13.5 dB so that the RTA displays a moderate level of activity.
9. Touch Measure . The mixer produces the test signal and captures the measurement data.
NOTE: Each output of a TouchMix mixer actually has two graphic equalizers. One is used by the Tuning Wizard to apply corrections based on the measurement data. Settings for this equalizer are indicated by the outlined or "ghost" fader caps on the GEQ screen. The other equalizer may be adjusted by the user. 10. Select a target tuning.
»» Select Flat The wizard flattens the system response using the Tuning EQ and sets the user EQ to flat. You can adjust to taste from there.
»» Select Live The wizard flattens the system response and applies a User EQ setting that works well for live sound reinforcement systems.
»» Select Keep Existing The wizard flattens the system response using the Tuning EQ but leaves the user EQ settings untouched.
11. Touch Restart if the measurement is interrupted by, for example, unexpected, loud ambient noise. Perform the measurement again.
12. Touch Finish to continue.
13. Touch Navigate To GEQ to view the GEQ settings.
1001108-01-E
23
User Buttons
The TouchMix-30 Pro has eight user-assignable buttons (U1 U8) while the TouchMix-8 and TouchMix-16 have four (U1 U4). The remote control apps for all models provide 8 user buttons. The following are assigned by default:
TouchMix-30 Pro
TouchMix-8 / TouchMix-16
· U1 Navigate Left (moves the selection left)
· U1 Navigate Left (moves the selection left)
· U2 Clear Clip (clears clipping indication from the Navigation Strip) · U2 Copy (see Copy & Paste)
· U3 Clear Cue (clears all cue selections)
· U3 Paste (see Copy & Paste)
· U4 Navigate Right (moves the selection right)
· U4 Navigate Right (moves the selection right)
· U5 Play/Stop (starts or stops playback)
· U5 Play/Stop (Tablet app only)
· U6 Rec/Stop (starts or stops recording)
· U6 Rec/Stop (Tablet app only)
· U7 Copy (see Copy & Paste)
· U7 Clear Clip (Tablet app only)
· U8 Paste (see Copy & Paste)
· U8 Clear Cue (Tablet app only)
The User Buttons may be reprogrammed to suit your preferences.
To program a User Button: Menu
User Buttons
User 1
Nav Left
Action
Selection
Detail
To complete the programming: Assign
Assign
Name Type Name
NOTE: The Name displays on the tablet app User Buttons.
Touch the Reset button to restore the default assignments.
TIP: For instant navigation to a particular screen, there's a simple shortcut method to program a User Button. Let's say that you want to be able to get to the input channel overview of the lead singer's channel (channel 12) quickly. Simply navigate to the Channel 12 Overview tab and hold a User Button for two seconds. Touch "Yes" and the User Button will now take you to the Channel 12 Overview screen no matter where you are.
MIDI Control
A USB-over-MIDI device such as a foot switch may be used to control some TouchMix-30 Pro functions. MIDI Control is similar in function to User Buttons.
1. To program MIDI Control: Menu
MIDI Setup
MIDI 1
Not in use
2. With a compatible MIDI device connected to the mixer, touch Learn MIDI .
3. Send a MIDI command to the mixer and that command will now be associated with the selected MIDI button.
4. To assign a function to the "learned" button:
Action
Selection
Detail
1001108-01-E
24
Security
The TouchMix mixers have multi-level security that allows you to assign passwords to various levels of functionality. You can give users access to only the functions they are authorized to use.
To set up Security: Menu
Security
Security Settings
IMPORTANT: Leaving a password field empty allows anyone to access the associated functions without any log-in. The Security Setup menu offers four levels of access:
· Administrator: Logging in as Administrator gives access to all mixer functions including Security Settings. If the mixer is accessible to others, it may be a good idea to enter an administrator password to prevent mischievous or inadvertent password creation that would lock you out of your own mixer. Be certain you can remember this password!
· All Access: · No password: Anyone can access all functions other than Security Setup. · Password protected: Access to Advanced functions requires password log-in.
· Simple Mode Only: · No password: Anyone can access all functions (other than Security Setup) in Simple Mode only. · Password protected: Access to all Simple Mode functions requires log-in.
· Levels Only: In order to password protect the mixer from any unauthorized adjustment, create a password for this level. · No password: Anyone can adjust level controls only. · Password protected: Access to level controls requires log-in.
Further restriction can be placed on each access level. · Overwrite Scenes & Presets: Allows or denies the ability to change a Scene or Preset in user memory. · Recall Scenes: Allows or denies the ability to recall a scene from memory. · Recall Presets: Allows or denies the ability to recall a preset from memory. · Auto-lock: Sets a timer that automatically logs out after a preset period (up to 25 hours) with no activity at the mixer controls.
To manually log-out of the mixer. Menu
Security
Lock/Logout
1001108-01-E
25
Monitor (TouchMix-30 Pro only)
The monitor output is most commonly used to feed a pair of monitor loudspeakers.
Monitor
To adjust Monitor level: Monitor Use the Master Rotary Encoder.
Source
The monitor pop-up includes the following controls:
10
Aux 1
Aux 2
Aux 3
Aux 4
5
· Source Selector Selects a signal for the Monitor output.
Aux 5
Aux 6
Aux 7
Aux 8
U
»» Aux 1 through 14 The monitor output signal is derived form the selected Aux mix.
-5
Aux 9
Aux 10
Aux 11
Aux 12
-10
»» Main LR The monitor output signal is derived from the Main L/R output.
Aux 13
Aux 14
Main LR
Cue
-20
»» Cue The monitor output follows the Cue selection.
· In Engages / bypasses the delay.
· Delay The delay is used to align the audio coming from a distant stage with the near-field monitor signal heard at the mixer position. Digital readouts are in feet, milliseconds, and meters.
Delay
0.00 ms
-40
In
0.00 feet
0.00 m
Touch Close or push Monitor to close the pop-up.
Close
Monitor (TouchMix-16 only)
Controls the output level for the Monitor Cue
To adjust Monitor level: Monitor Use the Master Rotary Encoder.
Monitor / Cue Level Controls the level of the Cue signal on the Monitor outputs.
NOTE: By default, no audio signal is sent to the Monitor Outputs. To send audio channel signals (including Main LR) to the Monitor Outputs, enable the Cue button for the channels you want to listen to.
Touch Close or push Monitor to close the pop-up.
Solo In Place (SIP) (TouchMix-30 Pro only)
When setting up a sound system, it can be very useful to mute all the inputs except for the one being worked on. This could be accomplished by manually muting all the other channels but there's a more convenient way.
To set up Solo In Place: Menu
Mixer Setup
Solo in Place
When Solo In Place is engaged, the input channels' Cue buttons change color to light red and are labelled SIP. Touching a channel's SIP button will mute all the other input channels and the SIP button turns solid green. Multiple inputs may be soloed. The Cue system functions normally for the mixer's outputs. The Solo In Place function does not affect FX returns. This means that when an input channel is soloed, any effect routed to that channel will still be heard in the mix. If it is desirable to hear a channel soloed without effects, the FX Mute button may be used to mute all effects independently.
IMPORTANT: Solo In Place (SIP) is an extremely useful function for setup and troubleshooting but can be hazardous during a show. Be certain to disengage Solo In Place when setup is complete.
1001108-01-E
26
TouchMix Reference
The information provided in this section gives you a detailed description of the screens and controls for the TouchMix-30 Pro and the TouchMix-30 Pro remote apps. The screen shots provided are taken from the TouchMix-30 Pro iPad App, and because of a different screen size, may appear slightly different than the TouchMix-30 Pro screens. The topics are in the order of the Info menu buttons on the mixer.
Getting Started
Top Panel and Remote-Device Controls 1
Cue
T(ToopuPcahnMeilxa-n3d0RPermo)ote-Device
Controls
(TouchMix-30 Pro) Trim
Trim
Trim
Trim
Trim
1
2
3
4
5
Trim
6
Trim
7
Trim
8
Trim
9
Trim
10
Trim
11
Trim
12
3
4
1. Trim knobs Channels 1 24 adjusts analog input signal level prior to A/D conversion.
Trim
Trim
Trim
Trim
Trim
Trim
Trim
Trim
Trim
Trim
Trim
Trim
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Stereo Input 29/30
2. Color LCD touchscreen
3. Cue headphone jack 1/4" stereo headphone jack. The output is controlled by clicking the Cue button on a
channel. Volume is controlled by pressing the Phones
button on the front panel.
2
4. Stereo Input 29/30 jack - Channels 29 and 30 are permanently linked. The input is a 3.5 mm stereo phone jack.
5. User buttons By default, these eight buttons are
assigned the following functions:
a. U1 Navigate left from the currently selected item
b. U2 Clear clip indicators
15 Home
16
Menu
17 Rec/ Play
18 AntiFeedback
19 RTA
TouchMix -30 Pro
5
U5
Copy
Paste
U6
U7
U8
6
Wizard
7 Mic
48V
8 Info
9
10 11 Aux
FX Mute
Mute Groups
12
13 14 Talkback
Phones
Talk
Monitor
21 0
U2
5 20 U1
U3 U4
c. U3 Clear Cue indicators
d. U4 Navigate right from the currently selected item
e. U5 Play button for the currently selected Play-back file. f. U6 Record button starts recording audio on the selected recording setup g. U7 Copy the selected item
My Network
15
h. U8 Paste the copied item to another item of the same type 6. izard button Starts the TouchMix wizard. Choices are: FX Wizard, Tuning Wizard, Gain Wizard.
16 Menu
7. Mic 48V button Opens the Phantom Power screen. Turn Phantom Power on/off and view status for all channels.
17 Rec / Play
8. Info button Opens the Info System but you already knew that or you wouldn't be reading this. 9. Aux button Opens the Aux overview screen. 10. FX Mute Mutes or unmutes all FX channels.
18 AntiFeedback
19 RTA
11. Mute Nroups Opens a screen where Mute groups may be controlled and edit
10 FX Mute
12. Phones button Push to display and select the Phones / Cue level control.
13. Talk button Momentary button that, when held down, opens the microphone connected to the Talkback mic input 6 Wizard
7 Mic 48V
Info
8
on the rear panel. The Talkback feature configuration is accessed from the Menu.
9
Aux
11 Mute
Groups
14. Monitor button Push to display and select the Monitor / Cue level control.
22
15. Home button Returns to the main screen with the fader bank (top navigation) and Aux (left navigation) in their
selected positions.
13 Talk
24 Follow
Mixer
16. Menu button Opens the Menu screen displaying a choice of menu options, including Mixer Setup. 17. Record/Play button - Opens the record playback screen displaying controls and options.
12 Phones
14 Monitor
18. Anti-Feedback button Opens the Anti-Feedback screen for the selected output. 19. RTA button Displays one of the mixer's two Real Time Analyzer.
a Nav Left
b Clear Clip
20. Master encoder Not available on remote devices. Changes values or position of selected control and scrolls through c Clear Cue d Nav Right
lists. Press while turning to make fine adjustments.
5
e Play/Stop
Record/ Stop
f
21. ø (Zero) button Press to move a control to its 0 (zero) position. 22. Nudge buttons Use these buttons to increment selected controls.
g Copy
h Paste
23. Fine button Available only on remote tablets. Press to make the nudge button increments smaller.
Zero
21 0
24. Follow Mixer button In this mode, the Remote Device defaults to the Overview screen of the currently selected
Fine 23
channel. When you change channels on the mixer, the remote device follows to the new channel and displays the new channel's Overview screen.
You can change to any of the other channel screens. In addition, you can select a control on the remote device and use the Master encoder knob to
change the selected control.
1001108-01-E
27
Rear Panel (TouchMix-30 Pro)
1. Standby Press to enter or exit Standby. A confirmation screen displays when entering Standby.
2. USB 3.0, Type A For attaching USB storage devices1, MIDI2 foot switch, Wi-Fi adapter, External Control Surfaces or upgrading the mixer firmware.
3. USB Type B For attaching a Mac-based DAW. The Mac must be running OS Yosemite or later.
4. Ethernet RJ45 For connecting to a network with wireless capability.
5. AC Mains power connection, 100-240 V, ~85 W, 50/60 Hz
1
Standby
2
USB
3 USB DAW
Analog Inputs
6
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
7
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
Ethernet
4
Stereo Inputs Cue
Aux
Aux
Monitor Main Mix
Aux Outputs
Phones 13/14
11/12
8 L 25/26 R
9
12 13 14 Left
Left
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
www.qsc.com
Mains
5100-240V ~85W 50/60Hz
L 27/28 R L 29/30 R
Talkback
(48V Selectable)
11
Right
Right
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
10
CAUTIONG!: If AC power is removed, wait for 5 seconds before reapplying the AC power.
6. Analog Inputs 1 through 20 Balanced XLR female connectors 7. Analog Inputs 21 through 24 Balanced XLR / 1/4" TRS female combination connectors 8. Stereo Inputs 25 - 30 TRS Two female balanced linked inputs per stereo pair. Odd number is left side, even number is right side. Stereo
pair 29/30 shared with 3.5 mm TRS on top panel. 9. Cue Phones, Aux 13/14, and Aux 11/12 Stereo female TRS 1/4" outputs 10. K Lock® Security Slot Compatible with the MicroSaver Security Cable 11. Talkback microphone Balanced female XLR, 48 V phantom power available 12. Monitor Left and Right Balanced male XLR outputs 13. Main Left and Right Balanced male XLR outputs 14. Auxiliary outputs 1 through 14 Balanced male XLRs
1 Drives must be formatted using the FAT32 file system. A FAT32 format utility is accessible from the Recording Setup screen. For best results use 7200 RPM, USB 3 hard drives or high-speed SSD. Drive performance is critical for recording. For more information and to see a list of qualified drives, visit qsc.com. At this time, the TouchMix-30 Pro-30 supports playback of MP3 digital audio files from the USB port, and exporting the recorded 2-Track files to the MP3 format.
2 The TouchMix supports "class compliant" USB MIDI devices. QSC has verified proper operation with these USB MIDI footswitches: iCON G-BOARD and Logidy UMI3
1001108-01-E
28
Left Side of the TouchMix-16 Mixing Surface 1
1. Rear Panel labels
2. Balanced female XLR inputs (112)
3. Trim - Channels 116 adjusts input signal level prior to 2
A/D conversion
4. Color LCD touchscreen
5. Balanced female XLR and 1/4" TRS combo
inputs (13-16). The TRS connectors supply a +10dB
3
pad.
6. Home Navigates up the menu structure to the Home screen
7. Menu Displays a choice of menu options, including Mixer Setup.
8. Record/Play - Displays recording controls and options.
4
Aux 1
Aux 2
Aux 3
Aux 4
Aux 5
Aux 6
Main Left Main Right Talkback
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
5
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Trim
10
Trim
11
Trim
12
Trim
13
Trim
14
Trim
15
Trim
16
Trim
Home
6
Menu
7
Record/ Play
8
Left Side of the TouchMix-8 Mixing Surface 1
1. Rear Panel labels.
2. Balanced female XLR and 1/4" TRS combo inputs (1
2
4). The TRS connectors supply a +10dB pad.
3
NOTE!: Inputs 1 & 2 may be switched to Hi-Z 4
for use with guitars and other instruments having passive pick-up systems. See Channel 1 or 2 Setup for more information.
3. Balanced female XLR inputs (58).
4. Trim - Channels 18 adjusts input signal level prior to
A/D conversion.
5
5. Color LCD touchscreen
6. Home Navigates up the menu structure to the
Home screen
7. Menu Displays a choice of menu options, including
Mixer Setup.
8. Record/Play - Displays recording controls and options.
Aux 1
Aux 2
Aux 3
Aux 4
Main Left
Main Right
Phones
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
Trim
2
Trim
3
Trim
4
Trim
5
Trim
6
Trim
7
Trim
8
Trim
Home
6
Menu
7
Record/ Play
8
1001108-01-E
29
Right Side of the TouchMix-16 Mixing Surface
1. ¼" TRS inputs (17/18 and 19/20) Line level, stereo.
Stereo In
1 17/18
TouchMix-16
Stereo In 19/20
My Network
27
2. ¼" TRS outputs Aux (7/8 & 9/10) For linelevel / in-ear monitors. May be configured as mono, balanced line-level outputs.
3. ¼" TRS output Cue For stereo Cue headphones.
2 Aux Out 7/8 3 Cue
Aux Out 9/10
7 Monitor
28 Menu 29 Rec / Play
4. Phantom +48V Displays input channel Phantom Power buttons.
4 Phantom +48V
8 Power
30 AntiFeedback
5. izard Links to wizards that assist with various tasks.
5 Wizard
9 Info
31 RTA
6. Auxes A shortcut to the Aux Mix screen.
7. ¼" TRS output Monitor For stereo controlroom loudspeakers.
6 Auxes
FX Mute
11
10 Mute
Groups
11 FX Mute
5
Wizard
Mic 48V
4
Info
9
8. Power (Standby) Takes the mixer in and out of Standby.
6
Aux
10 Mute
Groups
IMPORTANT!: Before removing power (unplugging) press the Standby button to put the mixer in Standby.
Level
12 Phones
Talkback Talk
13
Level Monitor
14
25
13 Talk
32 Follow
Mixer
12 Phones
14 Monitor
9. Info Displays the menu of help topics. In addition, you can change the language of the info system from the Info Menu.
10. Mute Nroups Displays Mute Group controls and setup options.
11. FX Mute Mutes all four FX outputs.
12. Phones Level Displays Phones level control, use Master Control to adjust.
User
16 U2
User
15 U1
23
0
User
U3 17
User
U4 18 24
15 Nav Left 17 Paste 19 Play/Stop 21 Clear Clip
16 Copy 18 Nav Right 20 Record/
Stop
22 Clear Cue
13. Talk Enables the Talkback microphone - press/ hold to talk.
14. Monitor Level Displays Monitor level, use Master Control to adjust.
Press for fine
Zero
23 0
Fine 26
26. Control Mode Changes the granularity of the Nudge control.
15. U1 User Button Factory default selects the next control to the left.
16. U2 User Button Factory default Copy 17. U3 User Button Factory default Paste 18. U4 User Button Factory default selects the next control to the
right.
19. U5 User Button Factory default Play / Stop (remote device only) 20. U6 User Button Factory default Record / Stop (remote device
only)
21. U7 User Button Factory default Clear Clip (remote device only) 22. U8 User Button Factory default Clear Cue (remote device only) 23. Ø Returns the selected control to its default position. 24. Master Control Adjusts the selected parameter, press & turn for
fine adjustments.
25. Nudge (+/-) Increases or decreases the value setting of the currently selected parameter.
27. Home Navigates up the menu structure to the Home screen.
28. Menu Displays a choice of menu options, including Mixer Setup.
29. Record/Play - Displays recording controls and options.
30. Anti-Feedback button Opens the Anti-Feedback screen for the selected output.
31. RTA button Displays the Real Time Analyzer. There is only one instance of the RTA. It can display on the remote tablet device, or the mixer screen, not both at the same time.
32. Follow Mixer button In this mode, the Remote Device defaults to the Overview screen of the currently selected channel. When you change channels on the mixer, the remote device follows to the new channel and displays the new channel's Overview screen. You can change to any of the other channel screens. In addition, you can select a control on the remote device and use the Master encoder knob to change the selected control.
1001108-01-E
30
Right Side of the TouchMix-8 Mixing Surface
1. ¼" TRS inputs (9/10 and 11/12) Line level, stereo. 2. Phantom +48V Displays input channel Phantom Power buttons.
IMPORTANT!: Before removing power (unplugging) press the Standby button to put the mixer in Standby.
3. Power (Standby) Takes the mixer in and out of Standby. 4. Auxes A shortcut to the Aux Mix screen. 5. izard Links to wizards that assist with various tasks. 6. Info Displays the menu of help topics. In addition, you can change
the language of the info system from the Info Menu. 7. Phones Displays Phones level control, use Master Control
to adjust. 8. Mute Nroups Displays Mute Group controls and setup options. 9. FX Mute Mutes all four FX outputs. 10. Ø Returns the selected control to its default position. 11. U1 User Button Factory default selects the next control to
the left. 12. U2 User Button Factory default Copy 13. U3 User Button Factory default Paste 14. U4 User Button Factory default selects the next control to the
right. 15. U5 User Button Factory default Play / Stop (remote device only) 16. U6 User Button Factory default Record / Stop (remote device
only) 17. U7 User Button Factory default Clear Clip (remote device only) 18. U8 User Button Factory default Clear Cue (remote device only) 19. Master Control Adjusts the selected parameter, press & turn for
fine adjustments. 20. Nudge (+/-) Increases or decreases the value setting of the
currently selected parameter. 21. Control Mode Changes the granularity of the Nudge control. 22. Home Navigates up the menu structure to the Home screen. 23. Menu Displays a choice of menu options, including Mixer Setup. 24. Record/Play - Displays recording controls and options. 25. Anti-Feedback button Opens the Anti-Feedback screen for the
selected output.
1 Stereo In 9/10
TouchMix - 8
Stereo In 11/12
My Network
22
2 Phantom +48V
4 Aux
5
Wizard
7 Phones
8
Mute Groups
12 U2 10
User
0
11 U1
3 Power
6 Info
9 FX
Mute
U3 13
User
U4 14
23 Menu
24 Rec / Play 25 Anti-
Feedback
26 RTA
9 FX Mute 5 Wizard
2 Mic 48V
Info
6
4 Aux
8 Mute
Groups
20
13 Talk
27 Follow
Mixer
19
7 Phones
14 Monitor
Press for fine
11 Nav Left 13 Paste 15 Play/Stop 17 Clear Clip
12 Copy 14 Nav Right 16 Record/
Stop
18 Clear Cue
Zero
10 0
Fine 21
26. RTA button Displays the Real Time Analyzer. There is only one instance of the RTA. It can display on the remote tablet device, or the mixer screen, not both at the same time.
27. Follow Mixer button In this mode, the Remote Device defaults to the Overview screen of the currently selected channel. When you change channels on the mixer, the remote device follows to the new channel and displays the new channel's Overview screen. You can change to any of the other channel screens. In addition, you can select a control on the remote device and use the Master encoder knob to change the selected control.
1001108-01-E
31
Rear Panel (TouchMix-16)
Power
Talkback
Main Right
Main Left
Aux 6
USB
®
Aux 5
Aux 4
Aux 3
Aux 2
Aux 1
12
3
4
5
6
1. USB 3 .0, Type A For attaching USB storage devices1, MIDI2 foot switch, and Wi-Fi adapter. 2. K & Lock® Security Slot Compatible with the MicroSaver Security Cable 3. Power Supply Use the power supply delivered with the mixer, do not substitute. 4. Talkback microphone Balanced female XLR 5. Main Right and Left output Balanced male XLRs 6. Auxiliary outputs 1 through 6 Balanced male XLRs
Rear Panel (TouchMix-8)
USB
®
Power
Phones
Aux 3/4
Right
Left
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1. USB 3 .0, Type A For attaching USB storage devices1, MIDI2 foot switch, and Wi-Fi adapter. 2. K & Lock® Security Slot Compatible with the MicroSaver Security Cable 3. Power Supply Use the power supply delivered with the mixer, do not substitute. 4. Phones Stereo 1/4" TRS. Line or headphone output is directed to this output when a channel Cue is activated. 5. Aux 3/4 Stereo 1/4" TRS. Line or in-ear output. This output is wired in parallel with Aux 3 and 4 XLRs. 6. Main Right and Left output Balanced male XLRs 7. Auxiliary outputs 1 through 4 Balanced male XLRs
1 Drives must be formatted using the FAT32 file system. For best results use 7200 RPM, USB 3 hard drives or high-speed SSD. Drive performance is critical for recording. For more information and to see a list of qualified drives, visit qsc.com. At this time, the TouchMix does not support importing or re-importing digital audio files that have been created or edited on another device.
2 The TouchMix supports "class compliant" USB MIDI devices. QSC has verified proper operation with these USB MIDI footswitches: iCON G-BOARD and Logidy UMI3
1001108-01-E
32
TouchMix-30 Pro Specifications
Parameter Display Inputs
Outputs
Digital Connections Input Channel Processing
Effects (FX)
Output Channel Processing
Sub Group Processing Recording/Playback Groups Cue Real Time Analyzer Wizards
Specification 10" (254mm) diagonal, 1024 x 600 pixel, color TFT, capacitive multi-touch sensing Total 32
20 Mic/Line, XLR, 48V Phantom Power 4 Mic/Line, XLR/TRS combo, 48V Phantom Power 6 Line (1/4" TRS + 1/8" (3.5 mm) TRS top panel) USB MP3 Playback (Type A rear panel) 1 Talkback (XLR with 48 V) 22 Total 2 Main L/R (XLR) 14 Aux Outputs (XLR) 2 In-ear Monitor (Stereo) (1/4" TRS from Auxes 11/12 and 13/14) 1 Cue (Stereo) (1/4" TRS) 2 Monitor (Stereo) (XLR) 2 USB A connector, 1 USB B connector, 1 RJ-45 (connection for Wi-Fi router) 4-band Parametric EQ with Hi/Low Shelving Option Variable 24 dB/octave HPF and LPF Gate Compressor Delay (100 msec max) 6 FX Engines Reverb Echo Delay Chorus Pitch Shift (assignable to a single mono input channel) 1/3 Octave Graphic EQ (Main L/R, Aux 1 - 14 ) Parametric EQ (Main L/R, Aux 1 - 14) Notch Filters (12-bands, all outputs) 100 msec. Delay, (all outputs) Limiter (all outputs) HPF & LPF (all outputs) 6-band PEQ HPF, LPF Compressor / Limiter USB Direct to Hard Drive multi-track (32 x 32) DAW / Computer interface 32 x 32 channel USB audio interface to Windows and macOS computers. Stereo MP3 Playback from USB 8 DCA 8 Mute 8 Sub Groups Selectable AFL PFL Solo in Place 2 x 1/3 octave 1 assigned to the selected channel 1 with user selectable source Anti-Feedback, Room Tuning, Gain, Effects
1001108-01-E
33
Parameter Preset/Scene Memory
External Control
Wi-Fi
Sampling Frequency THD Frequency Response Dynamic Range Equivalent Input Noise Residual Output Noise Crosstalk S/N Ratio Gain Maximum Input Level
Maximum Output Level Phantom Power Line Voltage / Input Power Requirements Dimensions (HWD) Weight
Specification
99 User Scenes, 143 Factory Presets 99 User Presets TouchMix Control Apps
for iPad® and Android tablets controls most mixer functions. for iOS® and Android smartphones controls personal monitor mix, rec/play, user buttons. Requirements iPad, iPhone (iOS 6 or later) / Android device (5.0 or later) Third Party Control Surfaces iCon Platform M+, Behringer XTouch Compact, PreSonus FaderPort 8 Requires: External ethernet Wi-Fi router (recommended) USB Wi-Fi adapter (QSC Part# CP-000033-00) Selectable 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz <0.005%, +4 dBu; 20 Hz-20 kHz, unity gain, any input to any output 20 Hz-20 kHz +/-0.5 dB, any input to any output 105 dB -126 dBu -86 dBu -80 dB -94 dB Microphone inputs: 75 dB (60 dB analog, 15 dB digital) +16 dB (XLR mic/line inputs), +26 dB ( TRS mic/line inputs), +24 dBu (TRS line inputs), 0 dBv (top panel 1/8" stereo input) +22 dBu (all line-level outputs) 48 v, all mic and talkback inputs, individually switchable per input 100-240 VAC, 50-60 Hz
Shipping: 12 in X 23.7 in X 19.5 in. (30.5 cm X 60.3 cm X 49.5 cm) Mixer only: 7.5 in X 16.9 in X 18.1 in. (19 cm X 42.9 cm X 46 cm) rack mountable with optional accessory Shipping: 25.2 lb (11.4 kg) Mixer: 17.5 lb (7.9 kg)
1001108-01-E
34
TouchMix-8 and TouchMix-16 Specifications
Display Inputs (Mic/Line) 1 Input (Talkback) Outputs 1
Digital Connections Input Channel Processing Effects
2-Trk (USB) & FX Return Processing Output Channel Processing
Recording/Playback 2 Groups Cue Real Time Analyzer Scene and Preset Memory
TouchMix-8
TouchMix-16
6.1" x 3.5" (156mm x 90mm) color TFT, touch sensing.
Total 12
Total 18
4 XLR / TRS combo (48V Phantom Pwr)
4 XLR / TRS combo (48V Phantom Pwr)
4 XLR (48V Phantom Pwr)
12 XLR (48V Phantom Pwr)
2 Stereo, TRS
2 Stereo TRS
N/A
1 XLR
Total 8
Total 12
2 Main, XLR, line-level
2 Main, XLR, line-level
4 Auxes, XLR, line-level
6 Auxes, XLR, line-level
1 Stereo TRS Cue/Mon
2 Stereo auxes, TRS
(Line or headphone, 16 min. imp)
(Line / In-Ear Monitor, 16 min. imp)
1 Stereo TRS, Aux 3/4
1 Stereo Mon, TRS
(Line / In-Ear Monitor, 16 min. imp)
(Line or headphone, 16 min. imp)
1 Stereo Cue, TRS
(Line or headphone, 16 min. impedance)
2 USB type A connectors
4-band parametric EQ with Hi/Low shelving option
Variable 24db/octave Low-cut & High-cut filters
Compressor
Gate
4 Professional effects engines configurable as:
Reverb (2 types)
Pitch shift
Mono delay
Stereo delay
Chorus.
Pitch Correct (One assignable to any mono input channel)
2-band shelving EQ
Variable 24db/octave Low-cut
Compressor
Gate
Main L/R & Aux 1 - 4
Main L/R & Aux 16:
1/3 Octave Graphic EQ (GEQ)
1/3 octave graphic EQ (GEQ)
Notch Filters (8-bands)
Notch Filters (8-bands)
All outputs
All Outputs
6-band Parametric EQ (PEQ)
6-band parametric EQ (PEQ)
Variable 18dB/oct Low-cut and High-cut filters
Variable 18dB/oct Low-cut and High-cut filters
Limiter/Compressor
Limiter/Compressor
100 msec. Delay
100 msec. Delay
USB Direct to Hard Drive multi-track (14 x 14)
USB Direct to Hard Drive multi-track (22 x 22)
Stereo MP3 Playback from USB
Stereo MP3 Playback from USB
8 DCA groups (with mutes)
8 Mute groups
Selectable AFL or PFL
1 x 1/3 octave
100 User Scenes
100 User Presets
100 FX presets
1001108-01-E
35
External Control 3
TouchMix-8 TouchMix Control Apps
TouchMix-16
for iPad® and Android tablets controls most mixer functions.
for iOS® and Android smartphones controls personal monitor mix, rec/play, user buttons.
Requirements
Wi-Fi 4 Dimensions (HWD) Weight Line Voltage Requirements Sampling Frequency Internal Processing Latency THD Frequency Response Dynamic Range Equivalent Input Noise Residual Output Noise Crosstalk S/N Ratio Maximum Input Level Phantom Power K & Lock® Security Slot 5 Included Accessories
iPad, iPhone (iOS 6 or later) / Android device (5.0 or later)
USB Wi-Fi adapter included
56 mm x 333 mm x 245 mm (2.2" x 13.1" x 9.6") 58 mm x 360 mm x 291 mm (2.3" x 14.2" x 11.5")
4.3 lb (1.95 kg)
5.9 lb (2.98 kg)
100 - 240 VAC, 50 - 60 Hz
Selectable 44.1kHz or 48kHz
32-bit floating point
<1.6msec, any input to any output
<0.005%, +4 dBu, 20 Hz - 20 kHz, unity gain, any input to any output
20 Hz - 20 kHz +/-0.5 dB, any input to any output
105 dB
-126 dBu
-86 dBu
-80 dB
-94 dB
+16 dBu (Mic/Line inputs, XLR), +26 dBu (Mic/Line inputs, TRS), +22 dBu (Stereo inputs)
48V, individually switchable per channel
Compatible with the MicroSaver Security Cable
USB Wi-FI adapter, Soft Carrying Case, Power Supply
1 All TRS connectors are 1/4 inch.
2 A list of drives that have been validated by QSC may be found at qsc.com. The hard-drive market is huge and continuously changing so there are many drives QSC has not validated that will work. Always test a new drive before using it for a critical session. Minimum requirement is USB 3.0 HD, SSD or 7200 RPM, FAT32 format.
3 The TouchMix App requires iOS 7 or higher.
4 Use only the Wi-Fi adapter supplied with your mixer.
5 Available on early production models of TouchMix-16.
1001108-01-E
36
TouchMixTM Feature List
Alphabetical list of some of the main features on the TouchMix-30 Pro, TouchMix-8, and TouchMix-16.
Feature 2-Track Playback 2-Track Record Amplifier Settings Anti-Feedback Auto Mixer Aux Mix on Faders Aux Mix Overview Channel Compressor Channel Controls Channel EQ Channel Gate Channel Linking Channel Overview Channel Presets Channel Safe Copy & Paste Cue Mode Cue Monitor Delay (TouchMix-30 Pro only) Cue Monitor Source (TouchMix-30 Pro only) DAW (TouchMix-30 Pro only) DCA Groups Digital Gain Effects EQ Effects Library Effects Mix Overview Effects Processors Effects to Auxes Effects to Auxes
Effects to Auxes FX Wizard Gain Wizard Languages
MIDI Control MP3 Player Multi-Track Record Mute Groups
Navigation Home > Stereo In/2-Trk Home > Stereo In/2-Trk Rec Home > Select a bank > Select an Output > Setup Select an output > Anti-Feedback Menu > Auto Mixer Select an Aux on left of screen Aux Home > Select a bank > Select a Channel > Comp Home > Select a bank > Select a channel Home > Select a bank > Select a Channel > EQ Home > Select a bank > Select a Channel > Gate Home > Select a bank > Select a Channel > Setup Home > Select a bank > Select a Channel > Overview Home > Select a bank > Select a Channel > Presets Menu > Channel Safe User Buttons U7 & U8 Menu > Mixer Setup Monitor
Info System Topic Two Track Playback, 2-Track Playback Misc Features, 2-Track Rec Output Channels, Setup Output Channels Filters / Anti-Feedback Topic Misc Features, Auto Mixer Misc Features, Aux Mix Output Channels, Aux Overview Input Channels, Compressor Home Screen, Channel Controls Input Channels, EQ Input Channels, Gate Input Channels, Setup See "Overivew" topics Input Channels, Presets Scenes / Safe Misc. Features, Copy/Paste Misc. Features, Mixer Setup Misc. Features, Mixer Setup
Monitor
Misc. Features, Mixer Setup
Rec/Play > Recording Mode > Multi-Track DAW
Misc. Features, DAW Interface
Home > DCA Groups > Select a DCA
Misc. Features, DCA Groups
Home > Select a bank > Select a Channel > Setup
Input Channels, Setup
Home > Select FX Masters bank > Select an FX Channel > EQ
FX Masters, EQ
Home > Select FX Masters bank > Select an FX Channel > Presets
FX Masters, Presets
Menu > FX Overview
FX Masters
Home > Select FX Masters bank > Select an FX Channel > Effect
FX Processors, sub-topics
Home > Select FX Masters bank > Select an FX Channel > Auxes
FX Masters, Aux Sends
Home > Select FX Masters bank > Select an FX Channel > Effect > FX Returns FX Masters, Aux Sends to Monitors
Select an Aux on left of screen > Select FX Masters
FX Masters, Aux Sends
Wizard > FX Wizard
Wizards, FX Wizard
Wizard > Gain Wizard
Wizards, Gain Wizard
Info > Languages OR Menu > Language , Deutsch, English, Français, Español
No Help Topic
Menu > MIDI
Misc. Features, MIDI Setup
Rec/Play > Recording Mode > Stereo MP3
Two Track Playback, 2-Track Playback
Rec/Play > Recording Mode > Multi-Track USB
Misc. Features, Recording and Recording Setup
Mute Groups
Misc. Features, Mute Groups
1001108-01-E
37
Feature
Navigation
Network Setup
Menu > Network
Noise
Menu > Talkback / Noise
Output Compressor/ Limiter
Home > Select a bank > Select an Output > Limiter
Output Delay
Home > Select an Aux bank > Select an Aux > Setup
Output Delay
Home > Select an Output channel bank > Select a channel > Setup
Output Filters
Home > Select a bank > Select an Output > Anti-Feedback
Output GEQ
Home > Select a bank > Select an Output > GEQ
Output PEQ
Home > Select a bank > Select an Output > PEQ
Output Presets
Home > Select a bank > Select an Output > Presets
Patch Matrix
Menu > Patch Matrix
(TouchMix-30 Pro only)
Phantom Power
Mic. 48V
Pick-off point, dynamics Menu > Mixer Setup
Pitch Correct
Home > Select a bank > Select a channel > FX
Polarity
Home > Select a bank > Select a Channel > Setup
Remote Control Setup Menu > Remote Control
Reset mixer
Menu > Mixer Setup
Room Tuning Wizard Wizard > Tuning Wizard
RTA (Channel)
Home > Select a bank > Select a Channel > EQ > RTA On
RTA (Selectable)
RTA
Sample rate
Menu > Mixer Setup
Scenes
Touch Scenes button (upper left corner of screen)
Security
Menu > Security
Solo In Place
Menu > Mixer Setup
(TouchMix-30 Pro only)
Speaker Settings
Home > Select a bank > Select an Output > Setup
Sub Groups Compressor/ Home > Select a Sub Group bank > Select a Sub Group > Limiter Limiter
(TouchMix-30 Pro only)
Sub Groups PEQ
Home > Select a Sub Group bank > Select a Sub Group > PEQ
(TouchMix-30 Pro only)
Talkback
Menu > Talkback / Noise
User Buttons
Menu > User Buttons
Wi-Fi
Menu > Network
Info System Topic Misc. Features, Network Setup Misc. Features, Talkback / Noise Output Channels, Limiter
Output Channels, Setup / Delay Output Channels, Setup Output Channels, Filters Output Channels, GEQ Output Channels, PEQ Output Channels, Presets Misc. Features, Patch Matrix
Misc. Features, Phantom Misc. Features, Mixer Setup Effects Processor, Pitch Correct Input Channels, Setup Misc. Features, Remote Control Misc. Features, Mixer Setup Wizard, Room Tuning Misc. Features, RTA Misc. Features, RTA Misc. Features, Mixer Setup Misc. Features, Scenes Security Misc. Features, Mixer Setup
Output Channels, Setup Sub Group Channels, Limiter
Sub Group Channels, PEQ
Misc. Features, Talkback / Noise Misc. Features, User Buttons Misc. Features, Network Setup
1001108-01-E
38
Nav Strip
NOTE!: The examples shown are from the TouchMix-30 Pro. TouchMix-8 and TouchMix-16 will differ slightly.
Home
Home (if needed)
The Nav Strip provides the primary means of navigating between fader banks. In addition, it provides an overview of all fader positions for the selected mix and any clipping conditions.
Inputs 1-8
Inputs 9-16 Inputs 17-24 Stereo In/2-Trk FX Masters Aux Out 1-8 Aux Out 9-14 Sub Groups DCA Groups
To access the Nav Strip From any screen, press Home once or twice to display Home page.
Blue Nav Strip Bank Indicates the currently selected bank. Touch the bank to select it.
Nav Strip Titles Indicates the type and range of the channels.
Faders The faders represent the current position of all the mixer's faders for the currently selected mix (Main, Auxes 1 - 14).Fader levels are not adjustable from the Nav Strip
Red Fader Slot This is a "sticky" clipping indication the channel is, or has been clipping. Reduce the input channel trim, then go to Menu > Mixer Setup > Clear Clip, or push the Clear Clip user button.
Inputs 18, 916, and 1724 Displays the fader settings for mic/line inputs.
Stereo In/2-Track Displays the fader settings for line inputs and for 2-track playback and record.
FX Masters Displays the level of the returns for the internal effects processors.
Aux Outputs 18, 914 Displays the level of the auxiliary outputs.
Sub Nroups 18 Displays the level of the eight Sub Groups (TouchMix-30 Pro only).
DCA Nroups Displays the level of the eight DCA master faders. Refer to the DCA Group Assignments topic. DCA Groups Displays the level of the eight DCA master faders. Refer to the DCA Group Assignments on page 108
1001108-01-E
39
Channel Controls
Input channels are shown on left. FX, Aux, and DCA channels may differ slightly. The Main L/R Channel is visible on most screens.
1. Select button Displays the user-defined channel name. Touch to access Master Channel controls.
2. Channel Cue button Routes the channel signal to the Phones and Monitor outputs regardless of Mute status. Green indicates "on".
3. Pan slider Adjust by touch or Master Encoder. Stereo pans are mirrored. 4. Mic 1 Represents physical XLR (1) and channel type (In, Aux, FX, etc.). 5. C Indicates the Compressor is engaged. Input channels do not have a Limiter. 6. N Indicates Gate is engaged. 7. 48 Indicates the Phantom Power is on. 8. "0" (Unity) 0 dB (Meter) 9. Meter (Input channel) Indicates the pre-fader signal level regardless of Mute
setting. Can be controlled by source output level, Trim knob or Digital Gain. 10. Mute Silences the channel audio to the Main L/R, Auxiliaries and FX. Does not
mute the send to multi-track. Orange color indicates the channel is muted by DCA or Mute Group. 11. Link Indicates linked adjacent channels. Lower numbered, odd channel links to higher numbered even channel. 12. Playback Indicates that the input to this channel is a recorded track. 13. Recording Armed Indicates this channel is armed for recording. 14. U (unity) 0 dB (Fader) 15. Channel/Main Fader Adjust by touch or Master Encoder. Yellow slot indicates selected. 16. Assignments Indicates to which mixes the channel is assigned: Main (L/R) all models, Sub Groups (1 8) TouchMix-30 Pro only. 17. Scene Displays the name of the active Scene. Touch to access Scenes. 18. L Indicates the Limiter is engaged 19. AF Indicates the Anti-feedback Filter is engaged 20. L/R Meters Indicate Main output signal level.
1
Joe
In 2
In 3
2
Cue
Cue
Cue
L
C
RL
C
RL
C
R
3
4 Mic
1
Mic
Mic
2 11 3
5
C
6G
48
7
1210
10
5
5
C
C
u G
u G
14 48
5
48 5
10
13 5 u
5
10
10
10
15
80
20
0
20
0
20
9
16
LR
40
12
LR
40
12
34
34
56
56
78
78
10
Mute
Mute
LR
40
12
34
56
78
Mute
17 Scene: Deltas Scene II
Main
Cue
Main
L/R
10
5
18 L u AF
19
5
10
20
0
20
40
Mute
1001108-01-E
40
Input Channels
IInnppuuttCChahnannenle-l O-vOervveierwview
Provides a single-screen view of frequently used
Home
Select an Input
Bank
Select Channel
Select Overview
Tab
controls and indicators for the input channel. 1. Overview tab Selects the Channel
Inputs 1-8
Inputs 1-8
In 1
Overview
Overview screen.
2. Preset Shows the currently selected Preset for this channel. Touch the + to change the Preset.
3. Polarity Reverse Changes the polarity of the signal.
4. Digital Nain Controls and indicates the amount of digital gain (+/- 15 dB) that has been applied to the signal.
5. Delay Controls and indicates the amount of delay (up to 100 msec.) applied to the signal.
6. Delay In Applies / bypasses the delay. 7. Reset Sets all controls for the input channel to
the factory default position.
8. L/R Subs (TouchMix-30 Pro only) Indicates the output assignments channel (L/R Main, Sub Groups 1 8).
9. DCA Indicates which DCA groups are assigned to the channel.
10. Mute Nroups Indicates which Mute groups affect the channel.
Main Mix L/R
1
Overview
EQ
Comp
Gate
FX
Auxes
Presets
Setup
Joe's Ears
Aux 1
Aux 2
Aux 2
2
3
+ Preset Ele Gtr Dyn
Polarity Reverse
8
L/R Subs L/R
12345678
4
5
67
Digital Gain
-3.0 Delay
0.00
In
Reset
dB
ms
9
10
DCA 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Mute Groups 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Prev
Next
Scene: Default
In 1
Main
Aux 3
Aux 3
Aux 4
Aux 4
Aux 5
Aux 5
Aux 6
Aux 6
Aux 7
Aux 7
Aux 8
Aux 8
Aux 9
Aux 9
Aux 10
Aux 10
Aux 11
Aux 11
Aux 12
Aux 12
Aux 13
Aux 13
Aux 14
Aux 14
EQ 11
20
12
AUX Sends 13
20
1 Joe's Aux
10 1
0
-10
14
2
10 4
2 Aux 2
0 3 Aux 3
-10
-20
20Hz
50
100
15
1
16 0.00
17 120
80.0
200
500
2
0.00
400
1K
2K
3
5K
4
0.00
0.00
18
2.0k
6.0k
-20 10K 20K
4 Aux 4 5 Aux 5
6 Aux 6 8.0k
19
Comp
Threshold
20
Gate
Threshold
21
FX Sends
1 Mono Delay
22 7 Aux 7
8 Aux 8
23 L
C
-12.0 Attack
16.0 Release
50.0 Ratio
-60.0 Attack
1.00 Release
250 Attenuation
2 Lush Reverb 3 Dense Reverb 4 Pitch Shift
9 Aux 9 10 Aux 10 11 Aux 11 12 Aux 12
4.0 Gain
60.0 Hold
5 Mono Delay
13 Aux 13
0.00
100
6 Lush Reverb
14 Aux 14
Cue
Cue
24
ML
C
R
M Mic
M1
M
ML G
M 48
M R
0 M
Main
L/R
10
10
5
5
L
u
u
F
5 5
10 10
20
0
20
M
LR
40
M
12
34
M
56
78
M
Mute M
40
Mute
11. Parametric EQ Nraph A graphic representation
of the equalization curve based on the EQ settings. The trace dims to indicate that the EQ is Out (disengaged).
· EQ Nraph Vertical Scale Represents audio level from -20 dB to +20 dB.
· EQ Nraph Horizontal Scale Represents frequency from 20 Hz to 20 kHz.
12. EQ In Engages / disengages the equalizer for the input channel.
13. Aux Sends
· Displays the system numbers and user-defined names for the Aux channels.
· Adjustable sliders send signal to the associated Aux channel output.
· Mute indicates if the channel's send to an Aux is muted or not.
14. EQ Handles Touch, hold, and drag to change the Frequency and Gain of the associated EQ band. The frequency band button must be engaged to see the EQ Handles. Pinching to change Q is supported on the TouchMix-30 and tablet apps for all models.
15. Low and High Cut Filter and Frequency Bands 1, 2, 3, and 4 These buttons engage or disengage the associated filter.
To adjust the following parameters, select the field then use the Master encoder or the up/down nudge buttons on a mobile device.
16. Nain, Bands 1, 2, 3, and 4 Displays and adjusts gain (+/- 15 dB) of the frequency band. 17. Low and High Cut Filter Frequency Displays and adjusts the knee frequency for the high and low cut filters. 18. Frequency Bands 14 frequency adjustment fields Displays and adjusts the center frequency for the four parametric EQ bands. 19. Comp
· Comp Engages or disengages the channel's compressor. · Threshold Displays and sets the level at which compression begins. · Attack Displays and sets the time it takes for the compressor to reach its maximum compression when the threshold level is exceeded. · Release Displays and sets the time it takes for the compressor to cease gain reduction when signal drops below threshold. · Ratio Displays and sets the amount of compression applied to the signal. · Nain Displays and sets the overall output gain to makeup any loss after the signal is compressed.
1001108-01-E
41
20. Nate To adjust the following parameters, select the field then use the Master encoder or the up/down nudge buttons on a mobile device.
· Nate Engages or disengages the Gate. · Threshold Displays and sets the signal level at which the Gate allows audio to pass. · Attack Displays and sets how quickly the gate reacts to a signal that exceeds the threshold. · Release Displays and sets how quickly the Gate attenuates the audio when signal falls below threshold. · Attenuation Displays and sets the amount of attenuation applied to the output when the signal is below the Threshold. · Hold Displays and sets the minimum time the Gate stays open once it is opened, and the length of time the Gate stays open after the
input level drops below the Threshold. 21. FX Sends
· Displays the system numbers and user-defined names for the FX channels. · Adjustable sliders send signal from this channel to the associated FX processors. 22. Aux Channel Link icon Indicates the two channels are linked. 23. Aux Pan control When two channels are linked, the even number send slider becomes a pan control.. 24. M Indicates if the channel send to the Aux mix is muted.
1001108-01-E
42
Input Channel Analog Trim
The Trim (gain) control sets the level of the analog input signal just before conversion to digital. The Trim controls are not available on the remote devices. Only Mic/Line Input Channels have Trim controls.
NOTE!: Proper gain trim adjustment prevents clipping, improves signal-to-noise performance, and allows preset compression and gate dynamics to function as intended.
Select
Home
an Input
Trim
Bank
Trim
1
Trim
Trim
Trim
Trim
Trim
Trim
Trim
Trim
Trim
Trim
Trim
Trim
11
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Trim
Trim
Trim
Trim
Trim
Trim
Trim
Trim
Trim
Trim
Trim
Trim
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Main Mix L/R
Inputs 1-8
2
Inputs 9-16
Inputs 17-24 Stereo In/2-Trk FX Masters
Aux Out 1-8 Aux Out 9-14 Sub Groups
DCA Groups
Scene: Default
NOTE!: The mixer also has digital gain trim. Its settings are stored and recalled with scenes and presets. See "Input Channel Setup" for more detail.
The following controls and indicators are used to set the input gain Trim:
1. Trim Controls Located above the touchscreen, adjusts sensitivity of mic/line inputs (TouchMix-30 Pro shown).
2. Nav Strip Touch to select a fader bank. · The red line in Inputs 1-8 fader bank is a clip indication that is persistent (sticky). It is cleared using the "Clear Clip" function (User Button 2) or from the Menu screen. Clearing the indication affects only the device (tablet or mixer) on which it was cleared.
Joe's Ears
Aux 1
Aux 2
Aux 2
Aux 3
Aux 3
Aux 4
Aux 4
Aux 5
Aux 5
Aux 6
Aux 6
Aux 7
Aux 7
Aux 8
Aux 8
Aux 9
Aux 9
Aux 10
Aux 10
Aux 11
Aux 11
Aux 12
Aux 12
Aux 13
Aux 13
Joe
In 2
In 3
In 4
In 5
In 6
In 7
In 8
Main
Cue
Cue
Cue
Cue
Cue
Cue
Cue
Cue
Cue
L
C
RL
C
RL
C
RL
C
RL
C
RL
C
RL
C
RL
C
R
Mic
1
L G 48
3
Mic
2
10
5 L
u G
5 48
410
Mic
3
10
5 L
u G
5 48
5 10
Mic
Mic
4
5
10
5 L
u G
5 48
610
10
75 L u G
5 48
10
Mic
6
10
5 L
u G
5 48
10
Mic
7
10
5 L
u G
5 48
10
Mic
8
10
5 L
u G
5 48
10
Main
L/R
10
10
5
5
L
u
u
F
5
5
10
10
0
20
0
20
0
20
0
20
0
20
0
20
0
20
0
20
0
20
LR
40
LR
40
LR
40
LR
40
LR
40
LR
40
LR
40
LR
40
40
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
56
56
56
56
56
56
56
56
78
78
78
78
78
78
78
78
3. Level Meter (Mic 1) Indicating that the signal level in the channel is below unity. If input gain trim
Aux 14
Aux 14
Mute
Mute
Mute
Mute
Mute
Mute
Mute
Mute
Mute
is properly adjusted, this will be seen when the source is playing somewhat below its average level
4. Level Meter (Mic 2) Indicating that the signal level in the channel is slightly above unity. If input gain trim is properly adjusted, this will be seen when the source is playing at its average level.
5. Level Meter (Mic 3) Indicating that the signal level in the channel is above unity. If input gain trim is properly adjusted, this will seen when the source is playing somewhat above its average level.
6. Level Meter Indicating the channel is clipping. Reduce the source output level or mixer input gain and clear the clip indication (User Button 2).
7. Input Channel Fader Adjusts the output of the channel to the Main L/R outputs, post-fader aux. sends, and Sub-Groups (TouchMix-30 Pro only)
1001108-01-E
43
Input Channel - EQ
Controls and displays the settings for the Input Channel equalization. 1. EQ tab Selects the EQ screen.
Inputs 1-8
Inputs 1-8
Home
In 1
EQ
Touch an Input Bank
Touch a Channel Selector
Touch the EQ Tab
2. EQ In Engages / disengages the equalizer. 3. RTA On Engages the Real Time Analyzer display.
Main Mix L/R
1
Overview
EQ
Comp
Gate
16
Scene: Default
FX
Auxes
Presets
Setup
Prev Next
NOTE!: A maximum of two RTA displays for TouchMix-30 Pro, and one RTA display for the TouchMix-8 and -16 are available at a time on any combination of a mixer and tablet devices.
NOTE!: When the RTA is off, the Parametric EQ graph expands to use the entire graph area.
4. Simple button Hides the Low Cut, High Cut, Frequency, and BW controls. Does not effect existing settings.
5. Reset button Sets all the EQ controls to their factory default position.
6. RTA display Displays the amplitude of the channel signal in 1/3 octave bands. Peak hold is displayed only on tablet devices.
2 Joe's Ears
Aux 1
PEQ Out
In
3
4
RTA On
Simple
5
Reset
In 1
Main
Aux 2
Aux 2
Aux 3
Aux 3
Aux 4
Aux 4
Aux 5
Aux 5
Aux 6
Aux 6
Aux 7
Aux 7
Aux 8
Aux 8
Aux 9
Aux 9
Aux 10
Aux 10
Aux 11
Aux 11
Aux 12
Aux 12
Aux 13
Aux 13
Aux 14
Aux 14
6 -5
-15
17
18
-5
Cue
-15
Cue
-30
-30
L
C
R
-45
-45
Mic
-60
1 -60
31.5 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1K 1.2 1.6 2K 2.5 3.1 4K 5K 6.3 8K 10K 12.5 16K
7 20
20
10 1
0
-10
8
3
4
10
L
G
0 48
-10
Main
L/R
10
10
5
5
L
u
u
F
5 5
10 10
-20
920Hz
10 50
100
1
200
2
500
1K
2K
11
3
-20
5K
1010K
920K
0
20
0
20
4
12 Low Cut
Gain
0.00
dB
15 Freq
13
Freq
120
80.0
Hz
Hz
14 Q
1.00
Gain 0.00 dB
Freq 400 Hz
Q 1.00
Gain 0.00 dB
Freq 2.0K Hz
Q 1.00
Gain 0.00
High Cut
LR
40
40
dB
12
15 Freq
Freq
6.0K
8.0K
34 56 78
Hz
Q
Hz
1.00
Mute
Mute
7. Parametric EQ graph A graphic representation of the equalization curve based on the EQ settings. The trace dims to indicate that the EQ is Out (disengaged).
· EQ graph vertical scale Represents audio level from -20 dB to +20 dB.
· EQ Nraph horizontal scale Represents frequency from 20 Hz to 20 kHz.
8. EQ Handles Touch, hold, and drag to change the Frequency and Gain of the associated EQ band. The frequency band button must be engaged to see the EQ Handles.
9. Low Cut and High Cut filter buttons These filters cut frequencies below or above the frequency set by the corresponding Freq control.
10. Low Shelf and High Shelf filter buttons Changes EQ Band 1 and Band 4 from parametric filters to shelving filters. When a shelf filter is engaged, the Bandwidth control is not available.
11. Frequency Bands 1, 2, 3, and 4 buttons Engages / disengages the associated parametric EQ band. Each band is fully parametric with a frequency range of 20 Hz to 20 kHz.
12. Nain control knob and readout Adjusts the gain at the frequency setting of the associated EQ band. Range of -15 dB to +15 dB.
13. Freq control knob (Frequency bands 1 4) Sets the center frequency of the associated EQ band. If the Shelving filter is engaged, the Freq control sets the knee frequency of the shelf filter.
14. Q knob Adjusts the bandwidth of the associated EQ band. When the Shelf Filter is selected, the Bandwidth control is hidden. In addition, Q can be adjusted by "pinching" (TouchMix-30 Pro and tablet apps only).
15. Freq control knob (Low and High Cut) Sets the frequency of the low and/or high cut filter as measured from a point 3 dB below 0 or unity.
16.
buttons Navigates to the next or previous channel. The buttons cycle through the Input, playback, record, and FX channels, then
loops back to Input 1.
17. Channel controls Output controls for selected channel. See Channel Controls topic.
18. Main Channel controls Output controls for the Main L/R outputs. See Channel Controls topic.
1001108-01-E
44
Input Channel - Compressor
The Compressor controls the dynamic range of a signal above a set Threshold.
Home
Touch an Input
Bank
Touch Channel
Touch Comp Tab
1. Comp tab Selects the Compressor screen.
2. Comp In / Out switch Engages and disengages the compressor.
3. Knee In button Determines how abruptly the compressor
transitions in and out of gain reduction as the threshold is crossed.
Knee
In
Out
4. Simple button Turns Simple mode on and off. Hides all controls except:
· Comp In
· Simple
· Reset
· Compression
Main Mix L/R
Joe's Ears
Aux 1
Aux 2
Aux 2
Aux 3
Aux 3
Aux 4
Aux 4
Aux 5
Aux 5
Aux 6
Aux 6
Aux 7
Aux 7
Aux 8
Aux 8
Aux 9
Aux 9
Inputs 1-8
Inputs 1-8
Overview
In 1
Comp
1
EQ
Comp
Gate
2
Comp Out
In
6 In
7 G.R.
Threshold 10
-33.3 dB
9
BC
E
Scene:
Default
FX
Auxes
Presets
Setup
Prev Next
3
4
5
Knee In
Simple
Reset
In 1
Main
8 Out
D
A
Ratio 2.1:1
11
Cue
Cue
L
C
R
Mic
Main
1
L/R
10
10
15 5
5
LC
L
u
u
G
F
5
48
5
10 10
5. Reset button Sets all the Comp controls to their factory default position.
6. In meter RMS input level
7. N .R . meter Gain Reduction (red) indicates how much the signal is being reduced by the compressor.
8. Out meter Output level after any applied compression
Aux 10
Aux 10
Aux 11
Aux 11
Aux 12
Aux 12
Aux 13
Aux 13
Aux 14
Aux 14
Attack
6.3 ms
12
16
De-Esser
17
6.0
In
Release
175 ms
13
Gain
00.0 dB
14
18
19
Side Chain
In 1
In
0
20
0
20
LR
40
40
12
34
56
78
Mute
Mute
9. Threshold slider Sets the point at which the compressor will begin to reduce signal level.
10. Compressor graph Vertical scale from 0 dB to -60 dB; horizontal measurement is time. When the Compressor is engaged, the trace is displayed.
· Threshold (A) The level at which compression begins.
· Attack time (B to E) The time it takes for the compression to reach its maximum compression after the input exceeds the threshold level.
· Ratio (A to E) The amount of compression applied to the signal.
· Release time (C to D) The time it takes for the compressed signal to rise to the threshold level once the input level no longer exceeds the threshold.
11. Ratio slider Sets the ratio of input level to output level when the signal exceeds the threshold.
12. Attack slider Adjusts how quickly the compressor reacts to a signal that exceeds the threshold.
13. Release slider Adjusts how quickly the compressor stops compressing when signal falls below threshold.
14. Nain knob (Compressor only) Adjusts the overall output gain to makeup any loss after the signal is compressed.
15. Compressor indicator When the Compressor is In, an orange "C" displays on the channel controls strip.
16. De-Esser knob Adjusts the amount of compression at the frequencies of sibilant consonants such as "s", "z", and "sh".
17. De-Esser button Engages or disengages the De-Esser.
18. Side Chain selector (TouchMix-30 Pro only) Selects another input channel to control the compression of the currently selected channel. Touch the Side Chain selector box then use the Master Encoder to adjust.
19. Side Chain In (TouchMix-30 Pro only) Engages or disengages the side chain. When the side chain is disengaged, the input of the currently selected channel controls its own compression.
1001108-01-E
45
Input Channel - Nate
The Gate passes audio above a set Threshold, and attenuates audio below the Threshold.
Home
Touch an Input
Bank
Touch a Channel
Select Gate Tab
1. Nate tab Selects the Gate Screen. 2. Nate In switch Engages or disengages the Gate. 3. Simple button Turns Simple mode on and off.
Hides all controls except: · Gate In button
Inputs 1-8
Inputs 1-8
2
In 1
Gate
1
3
4
· Simple button
5
6
7
· Reset button
9
· Gating knob
4. Reset button Sets all the Gate controls to their
8
10
factory default position.
A
B
5. In meter RMS input level
6. N .R . meter Gain Reduction indicates how much the signal is being reduced by the Gate.
E CD
7. Out meter Output level
8. Threshold slider Sets the point at which the Gate allows audio to pass.
9. Nate graph When the Gate is engaged, the trace turns green.
11
12
· Threshold (A)
· Attack time (A-B)
13
· Release time (C-D)
· Attenuation Level (E).
10. Attenuation slider Sets the amount of attenuation applied to the output when the signal is below the Threshold.
11. Attack slider Adjusts how quickly the gate reacts to a signal that exceeds the threshold.
12. Release slider Adjusts how quickly the Gate attenuates the audio when signal falls below threshold.
13. Hold knob Sets the minimum time the Gate stays open once it is opened, and the length of time the Gate stays open after the input level drops below the Threshold.
1001108-01-E
46
Input Channel - FX Sends
Controls how much of the Input channel's audio is sent to the FX devices. 1. FX tab Selects the FX Sends screen.
Input 1-8
Inputs 1-8
Home
In 1
FX
Touch an Input
Bank
Touch a Channel
Touch the FX Tab
2. FX Overview button Navigates to the FX Overview screen for a view of all 6 FX sends from all inputs.
3. Simple button Hides the Global FX Parameters for simplified operation.
4. Reset button Resets the FX sliders, Pre/Post settings, and the Pitch Correct settings. This button does not reset the settings for the FX processors including the Global FX Parameters on this screen.
5. FX Buses The thumbnail representation of the FX processor takes you to a screen where you can select the processor for that FX send, and adjust the parameters for the selected FX processor.
6. FX Label The larger text identifies the FX bus number, and does not change. The smaller text can be changed in the FX processor Setup screen.
7. FX Send sliders Sets the level of audio sent from the channel to the FX mix; "-inf" is off. The digital read-
Main Mix L/R
Overview
EQ
Comp
Gate
1
FX
Auxes
Presets
Setup
Prev
Next
Scene: Default
Joe's Monitor
Aux 1
Aux 2
Aux 2
Aux 3
Aux 3
Aux 4
FX Buses
5 Chorus
6
FX 1 Joe's FX
-40
-20
-10
U
10
7
Aux 4
Aux 5
Aux 5
Dense Reverb FX 2 FX 2
-40
-20
-10
U
10
Aux 6
Aux 6
Aux 7
Aux 7
Lush Reverb FX 3 FX 3
-40
-20
-10
U
10
Aux 8
Aux 8
Aux 9
Mono Delay FX 4 FX 4
-40
-20
-10
U
10
Aux 9
Aux 10
Aux 10
Aux 11
None
FX 5 FX 5
-40
-20
-10
U
10
2
FX Overview
3
4
Simple
Reset
In 1
Main
Global FX Parameters
Pre/Post Fader
Cue
Cue
8 Hz
Rate
8
9
Depth
-11.5
2.3
0.63
Pre
L
C
R
-23.0
Mic
Sec Rev Time
mSec Initial Delay
1
34.0
0.00
Post
m
Size
mSec Pre Delay
-inf
1.43
0.5
Pre
L
G
48
mSec Delay
% Regen
-inf
1.7
0.5
Pre
0
Param 1
Param 2
-inf
32
0.00
Pre
Main
L/R
10
10
5
5
L
u
u
F
5 5
10 10
20
0
20
out to the right of the slider indicates the slider setting.
8. Nlobal FX Parameters Provides control over the two most important parameters of the selected FX device. The parameters will differ depending on the selected processor.
Aux 11
Aux 12
Aux 12
Aux 13
Aux 13
Aux 14
Aux 14
Basic Chorus FX 6 FX 6
-40
-20
-10
U
10
-inf
Hz
Rate
1.5
Depth
0.5
Pre
10
Pitch Correct
Enable
Key
E
Blend Amount
20%
Correct Rate
8.3
Dry
Wet
Slow
Fast
LR
40
40
12
34
56
78
Mute
Mute
9. Pre/Post Fader button Selects a pre-fader or post-fader (default) pick-off point for the FX send. Changing this setting will change the pick-
off for all inputs.
10. Pitch Correct Refer to the Pitch Correct topic.
FX Signal Flow
Input audio passes through the EQ, and Dynamics (compressor and gate). At this point you can split the audio and send it to the FX system (Prefader), then the Channel Fader. Or, send the audio through the Channel Fader then split it and send it to the FX system (Post-fader).
"Dry" audio (no FX processing) continues through the Pan control to the Main L/R Fader and Main outputs.
The Pre-fader or Post-fader audio is sent to the Channel FX sends (The diagram shows just one of the FX Sends).
The FX Send slider determines how much of the channel audio is sent (or routed) to the assigned FX processor.
The FX processor works its magic on the audio and transforms the mono input into a stereo signal. The FX Master fader controls how much or how little of the processed ("wet") signal is combined with the unprocessed ("dry") audio before going to the Main L/R fader and on to the Main L/R outputs.
Audio
Input
Input Channels
EQ
Dynamics
Channel Fader
10 5 u 5 10
20
40
Channel Pan
L
C
R
Pre
Post
FX
-40
Send
-20
-10 -5 U 5 10
FX
10 5 u 5 10
20
40
FX Master
Main L/R
10 5 u 5 10 20
Main Left
40
Main Right
NOTE: For detailed information, refer to the Block Diagram.
1001108-01-E
47
Input Channel - Aux Sends
Auxiliary outputs are used to create a mix for stage monitors, in ear monitors, remote speakers or video / broadcast. The auxes may be linked for stereo.
Inputs 1-8
Inputs 1-8
Home
In 1
Auxes
Touch an Input Bank
Touch a Channel
Touch Auxes Tab
1. Auxes tab Selects the Aux Sends screen 2. Aux Overview button Navigates to the Aux
Overview which displays all Aux mixes on a single screen.
3. Reset button Resets all Aux Sends controls, for the selected input channel, to the factory default.
4. Aux mix system number Displays the number of the associated Aux Output.
5. Aux mix friendly name / button Displays the user-defined Aux mix name. Touch to navigate to the associated Aux output controls.
6. Aux send sliders Sets the level of audio sent from the channel to the Aux mix; -40 dB (-Inf) is off.
7. Level Provides a numeric display of the Aux send level.
8. Mute Mutes the send from the channel to the associated Aux mix. Does not effect any other mixes or sends.
9. Pick-off point button Indicates if the Aux Buss is taking a Pre Fdr/ Post Fdr / Pre Dyn / Pre All signal. Touch to navigate to the associated Aux output controls to change the setting. Affects all sends for the
Main Mix L/R
Overview
EQ
Joe's Ears
Aux 1
Aux Sends
Aux 2
Aux 2
Aux 3
Aux 3
Aux 4
Aux 4
4 1
5 Joe's Aux
2
Aux 2
3
Aux 3
Aux 5 4
Aux 5
Aux 4
Aux 6
5
Aux 6
Aux 5
Aux 7
Aux 7/8
Aux 9
Aux 9
Aux 10
Aux 10
Aux 11
Aux 11
Aux 12
Aux 12
6
Aux 6
7
10
8
Aux 7 Aux 8
9
Aux 9
10
Aux 10
11
Aux 11
12
Aux 12
Aux 13
Aux 13
13
Aux 13
Aux 14 14
Aux 14
Aux 14
Comp
Gate
1
FX
Auxes
Presets
Setup
2
3
Overview
Reset
Prev
Next
Scene: Default
In 1
Main
6-40
-40 -40
-20
-10
U
-20
-10
U
-20
-10
U
-40
-20
-10
U
-40
-20
-10
U
-40
-20
-10
U
-40
-20
-10
U
11 C
7 8 9 10
-3.0
Mute
Pre Fdr
10
-28.0
Mute
Post Fdr
10
-3.0
Mute
Pre Dyn
10
-12.0
Mute
Pre All
10
-inf
Mute
Pre Fdr
10
-inf
Mute
Pre Fdr
10
-inf
Mute
Pre Fdr
Cue
Cue
L
C
R
Mic
1
L G 48
Main
L/R
10
10
5
5
L
u
u
F
5 5
10 10
-40
-20
-10
U
10
-inf
Mute
Pre Fdr
0
20
0
20
-40
-20
-10
U
10
-inf
Mute
Pre Fdr
-40
-20
-10
U
10
-inf
Mute
Pre Fdr
LR
40
40
12
-40
-20
-10
U
10
34
-inf
Mute
Pre Fdr
56
-40
-20
-10
U
10
78
-inf
Mute
Pre Fdr
-40
-20
-10
U
10
-inf
Mute
Pre Fdr
Mute
Mute
associated aux mix.
10. Aux link indicator Indicates the Aux channels are linked. You can link Aux channels from the Input channel Aux Sends screen by touching
one of the Aux mix buttons, or one of the pick-off buttons. Both take you to the Aux channel Setup screen where linking is accomplished.
11. Aux Sends pan slider Pans the signal between a linked pair of auxes.
Auxiliary Channels Flow Diagram
The Pre All, Pre Dyn, Pre Fader, and Post Fader buttons are radio-buttons that provide options for where the Aux Outputs get their signal. In the figure below, the Pre Fader button is selected.
Audio
Input
Input
Channels
EQ
Dynamics
Channel Fader
Channel Pan
L
C
R
Post Fader
Aux Sends
-10 -5 U 5 10
Pre All
Pre Dyn
NOTE: For detailed information, refer to the Block Diagram.
Pre Fader
-40
-20
Aux Outputs
1001108-01-E
48
Input Channel - Presets
Recall presets from the factory library. Store and recall user presets. 1. Presets tab Selects Presets screen.
Inputs 1-8
Inputs 1-8
Home
Touch an Input Bank
In 1
Presets
Touch a Channel
Touch the Presets
Tab
2. Current Preset Displays the name of the current preset.
3. Preset Info (Factory only) Touch to display details about a preset. Information provided may include style of music, instrument details, microphone/pickup type and position, or other helpful information.
4. Factory / User switch Toggles between Factory and User preset libraries.
· Factory Presets A library of QSC designed input-channel presets.
· User Presets User Presets may be stored to and recalled from Internal memory or an External (USB) storage device.
5. Instrument list (Factory only) Displays a list of instrument categories. .
6. Type list (Factory only) Displays a list of specific instruments within the selected Instrument category.
7. Preset Name list (Factory only) Displays a list of professionally voiced, live-sound presets.
8. Recall button Recalls the selected Preset. Recalls all parameters for an Input Channel except: Analog/ Multi-track state, Track/Arm button, Cue, Mute,
Main Mix L/R
Joe's Ears
Aux 1
Aux 2
Aux 2
Aux 3
Aux 3
Aux 4
Aux 4
Aux 5
Aux 5
Aux 6
Aux 6
Aux 7
Aux 7
Aux 8
Aux 8
Aux 9
Aux 9
Aux 10
Aux 10
Overview
EQ
Comp
Gate
FX
2
Current Preset
Ele Gtr Dyn Rock 1
5 Instrument
Assorted Bass Drums Frets Keyboards Percussion Strings Vocals and Speach Wind
4
Factory
User
6
Type
Acoustic Guitar Banjo Electric Guitar Mandolin Resonator Guitar
1
Auxes
Presets
Setup
Prev
Next
Scene: Default
3 Preset Info
In 1
Main
7
Preset Name
Ele Gtr Dyn Blues Ele Gtr Dyn Clean Ele Gtr Dyn Metal Ele Gtr Dyn Rock 1 Ele Gtr Dyn Rock 2 Ele Gtr Dyn
Cue
Cue
L
C
R
Mic
1
L G 48
Main
L/R
10
10
5
5
L
u
u
F
5 5
10 10
0
20
0
20
Aux 11
Aux 11
Aux 12
Aux 12
Aux 13
Aux 13
Aux 14
Aux 14
Recall Options
9
Omit Levels & Assignments
8
Recall
10
Omit Name
11
Omit Phantom
LR
40
40
12
34
56
78
Mute
Mute
Channel Link state
9. Omit Levels & Assignments switch When engaged, channel, FX and aux levels as well as mute, sub group and DCA assignments are not effected by preset recall.
10. Omit Name switch When engaged, Channel Name is not effected when a preset is recalled. 11. Omit Phantom switch When engaged, Phantom power setting is not effected when a preset is
recalled
NOTE!: The following controls are available only when the Factory / User switch is set to User.
2
Current Preset
Ele Gtr Dyn Rock 1
4
Factory
User
13
Mixer
14
USB
Al's Bass Joe's Vocal Cajon Acoustic 12-string
Garage Guitar Shaker Tamborine Lap Cajon
12 Save/Save As
Sandy - Keys
Sandy - Keys - updated
12. Save / Save As Button Displays the Save Preset As screen with options for naming a preset and selecting internal or USB storage destination.
13. Mixer list Displays a list of user-defined presets that are saved on the mixer. 14. External (USB) list Displays a list of user-defined presets that are saved on a USB drive
currently connected to the mixer. 15. Copy to USB button Copy the selected Internal preset to a USB drive connected to the mixer. 16. Copy to Mixer button Copy the selected USB preset to the Internal Mixer storage.
17 15 Copy To USB
16
17
Copy To Mixer
8
Recall Options
9
Omit Levels
Recall
10
Omit Name
11
Omit Phantom
17. Delete button Select a preset and touch this button to delete the preset.
NOTE!: When saving a preset using an external tablet device do not use unsupported characters in the name. Supported characters are 0 to 9, A to Z, a to z, a period (.), hyphen
User Preset Screen
Save Preset As:
(-), equal sign (=), exclamation point (!), parenthesis, underscore (_), or plus sign (+).
18. Save button Saves the preset to the location indicated by the Internal / External (USB) switch. In addition, the Save button recalls the preset.
19. Cancel button Cancels the Save operation 20. File name field This field displays the currently recalled preset name. There are two options:
20
Preset 2-3
Storage Location
21
Mixer
USB
· Choose to keep the same name. If the name exists in the target location, confirmation is required to overwrite.
18 Save
19 Cancel
· Change the name partially or in whole. If the name does not exist in the selected location, the
preset saves. 21. Storage Location switch Select either Mixer or USB for the location in which the preset is to be saved.
Save Preset As Screen
1001108-01-E
49
Input Channel - Setup
Channel Setup is provided for all input channels. Line input channels do not have Phantom power controls. 1. Setup Selects the Setup screen
Inputs 1-8
Inputs 1-8
Home
In 1
Setup
Touch an Input
Bank
Touch a Channel
Touch the Setup Tab
2. Name Displays the name of the channel. Touch to display a keyboard and rename the channel.
3. Link Links adjacent channels. The odd numbered channel settings are copied to the even numbered channel. Pan settings are mirrored. Only odd > even pairings are supported even > odd pairings are not.
4. Reset Resets the controls for this channel to factory defaults.
5. Playback and Recording
When one of these buttons is engaged, the other is not displayed. The example above is for illustration only.
· Digital Input (TouchMix-30 Pro only) Selects the channel's analog or digital input as the signal source. The digital source may be from a USB recording session or from a DAW (see Rec/ Playback for more information). Green = digital, gray = analog.
· Recording (Arm) When engaged, the audio on this channel will be recorded on the USB Drive. Available only when the External Recording & Playback Mode is set to Multitrack USB Drive.
Main Mix L/R
Joe's Ears
Aux 1
Aux 2
Aux 2
Aux 3
Aux 3
Aux 4
Aux 4
Aux 5
Aux 5
Aux 6
Aux 6
Aux 7
Aux 7
Aux 8
Aux 8
Aux 9
Aux 9
Aux 10
Aux 10
Aux 11
Aux 11
Aux 12
Aux 12
Aux 13
Aux 13
Aux 14
Aux 14
Overview
EQ
2
Banjo
Comp
Gate
FX
Auxes
3 Link
1
Presets
Setup
4 Reset
Prev Next
2
Banjo
Scene: Default
Main
Digital Input
5
Track
Recording Arm
Polarity
Mic Phantom
Patch Matrix Channel
6
7
8
Cue
Cue
Normal
Reverse
48V
In 1
L
C
R
Units
9 Delay 0.00
feet
In
0.00
ms
0.00 meters
10 Channel Safe
During Scene Recall
Recallable
Safe
Assignments
12
Main L/R
Mic
Digital Gain 11 1
1.00 dB
L G 48
Main
L/R
10
10
5
5
L
u
u
F
5 5
10 10
13 Sub 1
Yellow
Sub 2 Sub 2
Sub 3 Sub 3
Sub 4 Sub 4
Sub 5 Sub 5
Sub 6 Sub 6
Sub 7 Sub 7
Sub 8 Sub 8
0
20
0
20
14 DCA 1
DCA 1
DCA 2 DCA 2
DCA 3 DCA 3
DCA 4 DRUMS
DCA 5 DCA 5
DCA 6 DCA 6
DCA 7 DCA 7
DCA 8 DCA 8
Mute 1
15
Band
Mute 2 Mute 2
Mute 3 Mute 3
Mute 4 Mute 4
Mute 5 Mute 5
Mute 6 Mute 6
Mute 7 Mute 7
Mute 8 Mute 8
LR
40
40
12
34
56
78
Mute
Mute
6. Polarity Touch to change polarity of the channel output.
7. Mic Phantom Turns 48V phantom power on/off for the channel (microphone inputs only).
8. Patch Matrix Channel (TouchMix-30 Pro only) Displays the current setting for this channel in the Patch Matrix. If another channel has been patched to this channel, the field would display the patched channel's number.
9. Delay Delays the input signal from 0.00 to 100 milliseconds. Touch the In button to activate the delay.
10. Channel Safe During Scene Recall Setting this switch to Safe, protects the channel controls from being changed when a Scene is recalled.
11. Digital Nain Applies +/- 15 dB of digital gain to the channel signal independently of the channel's analog gain trim. The setting of this control is stored and recalled with a scene or preset. When Track is selected as the source, the control applies to the digital input.
12. Main L/R Assigns the channel's output to the Main Left / Right mix. The factory default is on assigned to Main L/R.
13. Sub Nroups (1 through 8 TouchMix-30 Pro only) Assigns the output of the channel to one or more of the eight Sub Groups. Userassigned names display on the buttons. See the Sub Groups topic.
14. DCA Nroup (1 through 8) Assigns the channel to DCA Groups. User-assigned DCA Group names display on the buttons. See the DCA Groups topic.
15. Mute Nroups (1 through 8) Assigns the channel to Mute Groups. User-assigned Mute Group names display on the buttons. See the Mute Groups topic.
1001108-01-E
50
Output Channels
Output Channel Overview
Provides a single-screen view of frequently used controls and indicators for the output channel. 1. Overview tab Selects the Channel Overview screen.
Aux Out 1-8
Inputs 1-8
Select an
Home
Output
Bank
Aux 1
Overview
Select Channel
Select Overview
Tab
2. Preset Shows the currently selected Preset for this channel.
3. Pick-off point (Auxes only) Determines where the signal for the output channel is taken.
4. Delay Controls and indicates the amount of delay (up to 100 msec.) applied to the signal.
5. Delay In Applies / bypasses the delay. 6. Reset Sets all controls for the input channel to
the factory default position.
7. Description of the Current Preset
8. DCA Indicates which DCA groups are assigned to the channel.
9. Mute Indicates which Mute groups control the channel. 10. Parametric EQ Nraph A graphic representation
of the equalization curve based on the EQ settings. When the EQ is engaged, the trace becomes brighter.
· EQ Nraph Vertical Scale Represents audio level from -20 dB to +20 dB.
· EQ Nraph Horizontal Scale Represents frequency from 20 Hz to 20 kHz.
Main Mix L/R
Joe's Ears
Aux 1
Aux 2
Aux 2
Aux 3
Aux 3
Aux 4
Aux 4
Aux 5
Aux 5
Aux 6
Aux 6
Aux 7
Aux 7
Aux 8
Aux 8
Aux 9
Aux 9
Aux 10
Aux 10
Aux 11
Aux 11
Aux 12
Aux 12
Aux 13
Aux 13
Aux 14
Aux 14
1
Overview
PEQ
2
Preset
E10 Monitor
GEQ
AntiFeedback
Limiter (Comp)
Auxes
Presets
3
Pre Fdr Post Fdr Pre Dyn Pre All
4
Delay
5
0.00
In
ms
Setup
6
Reset
Scene: Default Prev Next
E10 Monitor Main
7 Tuned for QSC E10 Monitor
PEQ 10
20
8 DCA 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 Mute Groups 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
11 Out
In AUX Sends 13
20
Cue
Cue
10 11
0
-10
-20 20Hz
14
50
100
1
15 0.00
16 120
80.0
18
Comp
Threshold GR
-12.0
Attack 16.0
Release 50.0
Ratio 4.0
12
5
22
3
4
200
500
2
0.00
400
1K
2K
3
5K
4
0.00
0.00
17
2.0k
6.0k
10 66
0 -10 -20 10K 20K
8.0k
9 Aux 9 10 Aux 10 11 Aux 11 12 Aux 12 13 Aux 13
14 Aux 14
Aux
1
C AF
Main
L/R
10
10
5
5
L
u
u
F
5 5
10 10
0
20
0
20
M
M
LR
40
M
12
34
M
56
78
M
Mute M
40
Mute
11. EQ Out/In Engages / disengages the equalizer for the channel.
12. EQ Handles Touch, hold, and drag to change the Frequency and Gain of the associated EQ band. The frequency band button must be engaged to see the EQ Handles.
13. Aux Sends (TouchMix-30 Pro only)
· Aux sends 9 14 are available for Aux Outputs 1 8 only,
· Displays the system numbers and user-defined names for the Aux channels.
· Adjustable sliders send signal to the associated Aux channel output.
· Mute indicates if the channel's send to an Aux is muted or not.
14. Low and High Cut Filter and Frequency Bands 1, 2, 3, and 4 These buttons engage or disengage the associated filter.
To adjust the following parameters, select the field then use the Master encoder or the up/down nudge buttons on a mobile device.
15. Nain, Bands 1, 2, 3, and 4 Displays and adjusts gain (-15 to +15 dB) for the selected frequency band. 16. Low and High Cut Filter Frequency Displays and adjusts the knee frequency for the high and low cut filters. 17. Frequency Bands 14 frequency adjustment fields Displays and adjusts the center frequency for the four parametric EQ bands.
NOTE!: The following section can be a Compressor or Limiter depending on the Comp/Limit switch on the Comp/Limiter tab.
18. Comp · Comp Engages or disengages the channel's compressor. · Threshold Displays and sets the level at which compression begins. · Attack Displays and sets the rate at which the compressor reaches its maximum compression when the threshold level is exceeded. · Release Displays and sets the rate at which the compressor ceases gain reduction when signal drops below threshold. · Ratio Displays and sets the amount of compression applied to the signal.
1001108-01-E
51
Output Channel - NEQ
Controls and displays the settings for Main or Auxiliary output graphic equalization.
Home
Touch an Aux Bank
Touch an Aux Channel
Touch GEQ Tab
1. NEQ tab Selects the GEQ screen.
2. NEQ In/Out switch Engages / disengages the equalizer.
3. Tuning In/Out switch Engages / disengages the settings established by the Room Tuning Wizard. See the Room Tuning Wizard topic for more information.
4. Tuning izard button Starts the tuning wizard for the selected channel.
5. RTA On Turns the RTA (Real-time Analyzer) on and off.
6. Reset Sets all EQ controls to factory default values.
7. RTA graph Displays the amplitude of the channel signal in 1/3 octave bands. Peak hold is displayed only on tablet devices.
8. Nraphic Equalizer Displays the controls for the 1/3 octave graphic equalizer. If the Tuning switch is on, a second set of EQ fader caps (blue outline) will be displayed to indicate the settings established by the Room Tuning Wizard.
9. Prev / Next Navigates to the next or previous channel. The buttons cycle through the Input, Playback, Record, and FX channels, then loops back to Input 1.
Aux Outputs1-8
Inputs 1-8
Aux 1
GEQ
Main Mix L/R
Overview
1
PEQ
GEQ
AntiFeedback
Limiter (Comp)
Auxes
Presets
Setup
9
Prev Next
Scene: Default
2 Joe's Monitor
3
Aux 1
GEQ Out
In Tuning Out
In
4
Tuning Wizard
5
6
RTA On
Reset
Joe's Monitor
Main
Aux 2
Aux 2
Aux 3
Aux 3
Aux 4
Aux 4
Aux 5
Aux 5
Aux 6
Aux 6
Aux 7
Aux 7
Aux 8
Aux 8
Aux 9
Aux 9
Aux 10
Aux 10
7 -5
-15
10
-5
Cue
-15
11
Cue
-30
-30
L
C
R
-45
-45
Aux
-60
1 -60
31.5 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1K 1.2 1.6 2K 2.5 3.1 4K 5K 6.3 8K 10K 12.5 16K
8
C AF
Main
L/R
10
10
5
5
L
u
u
F
5 5
10 10
0
20
0
20
Aux 11
Aux 11
Aux 12
Aux 12
Aux 13
Aux 13
LR
40
40
12
34
56
78
Aux 14
Aux 14
Mute
Mute
10. Channel controls Controls for selected Output channel. See Channel Controls topic.
11. Main Channel controls Controls for the Main L/R outputs. See Channel Controls topic.
1001108-01-E
52
Output Channel - PEQ
Controls and displays the settings for the Main or Auxiliary output parametric equalization.
Home
Touch an Aux Bank
Touch an Aux Channel
Touch the PEQ Tab
1. PEQ tab Selects the PEQ screen. 2. PEQ In/Out switch Engages / disengages
the equalizer. 3. RTA On button Turns the RTA (Real-time
Analyzer) on and off.
NOTE!: When the RTA is off, the Parametric EQ graph expands to use the entire graph area.
4. Simple button Hides the Low Cut, High Cut, Frequency, and BW controls. Does not effect existing settings.
5. Reset button Sets all EQ controls to factory default values.
6. RTA graph Displays the amplitude of the channel signal in 1/3 octave bands. Peak hold is displayed only on tablet devices.
7. Parametric EQ graph A graphic representation of the equalization curve based on the EQ settings. The trace dims to indicate that the EQ is Out (disengaged). · EQ Nraph vertical scale Represents audio level from -20 dB to +20 dB.
Aux Outputs1-8
Inputs 1-8
Aux 1
PEQ
Main Mix L/R
1
Overview
PEQ
2 Joe's Monitor
Aux 1
PEQ Out
In
Aux 2
Aux 2
6
Aux 3
Aux 3
Aux 4
Aux 4
Aux 5
Aux 5
GEQ
AntiFeedback
Comp
Auxes
Presets
Setup
3
4
RTA On
Simple
5
Reset
16
Scene: Default
Prev Next
Joe's Monitor
17
Main
18
Cue
Cue
L
C
R
Aux
Main
1
L/R
Aux 6
Aux 6
Aux 7
Aux 7
Aux 8
Aux 8
Aux 9
Aux 9
Aux 10
Aux 10
Aux 11
Aux 11
Aux 12
Aux 12
Aux 13
Aux 13
Aux 14
Aux 14
7
1
10
10
3
5
5
C
L
8
5
u
u
F
F
5
5
2
4
6
10
10
9 10 20Hz
50
100
200
500
1K
2K
5K
1010K
920K
0
20
0
20
1
2
3 11 4
5
6
Low Cut
12 Gain 0.00
dB
dB
15 Freq 120
13 Freq 80.0
Hz
Hz
Hz
14 Q
1.00
Gain 0.00
dB
Freq 200
Hz
Q 1.00
Gain 0.00
dB
Freq 500
Hz
Q 1.00
Gain 0.00
dB
Freq 1.00k
Hz
Q 1.00
Gain 0.00
dB
Freq 3.0k
Hz
Q 1.00
Gain High Cut 0.00
15 Freq
Freq
8.0k
8.0K
LR
40
12
34
56
78
Q
Hz
1.00
Mute
40
Mute
· EQ Nraph horizontal scale Represents frequency from 20 Hz to 20 kHz.
8. EQ Handles Touch, hold, and drag to change the Frequency and Gain of the associated EQ band. The frequency band button must be engaged to see the EQ Handles.
9. Low and High Cut Filter buttons These filters cut frequencies below or above the frequency set by the corresponding Freq control.
10. Low and High Shelf Filter buttons Changes EQ Band 1 and Band 6 from parametric filters to shelving filters. When a shelf filter is engaged, the Bandwidth control is not available.
11. Frequency Bands 1 - 6 In/Out buttons Engages / disengages the associated parametric EQ band.
12. Nain knob Adjusts and displays the gain at the frequency setting of the associated EQ band. Range of -15 dB to +15 dB.
13. Freq knob Adjusts and displays the center frequency of the associated EQ band. The range is 20 Hz to 20 kHz for all bands. If the Shelving filter is engaged, the Freq control sets the knee frequency of the shelf filter.
14. Q knob Adjusts the bandwidth of the associated EQ band. When the Shelf Filter is selected, the Bandwidth control is hidden. Q may also be adjusted by "pinching" (TouchMix-30 Pro and tablet apps only).
15. Freq knob (Low and High Cut) Sets the knee frequency of the low and/or high cut filter as measured from a point 3 dB below 0 or unity.
16. Prev / Next buttons Navigates to the next or previous channel. The buttons cycle through the Input, Playback, Record, and FX channels, then loops back to Input 1.
17. Channel controls Output controls for selected channel. See Channel Controls topic.
18. Main Channel controls Output controls for the Main L/R outputs. See Channel Controls topic.
1001108-01-E
53
Output Channel - Compressor / Limiter
When set as a Limiter, prevents the audio level from exceeding a preset threshold.
Home
Touch Aux Out
18 or 914
Touch an Aux Channel
Touch the Limiter Tab
1. Comp / Limiter tab Selects the Comp /Limiter screen. Note that the label on this tab will change depending on the setting of the Comp/Limiter switch.
2. Comp / Limiter In/Out switch Engages or disengages the compressor or limiter. Note that the label on this tab will change depending on th setting of the Comp/Limiter switch.
3. Comp/Limit switch Selects Compressor or Limiter mode. If "Comp" is selected, the processor is identical in operation to the input channel compressors.
4. Knee In button The knee determines whether the compressor/limiter transitions abruptly or gradually as the threshold is crossed.
5. Simple button Hides all controls except: · Limiter In button
· Simple button
· Reset button
6. Reset button Sets all the Limiter controls to their factory default position.
7. In meter RMS input signal level
8. NR meter Gain Reduction indicates how much the signal level has been reduced by the Limiter.
9. Out meter Output signal level 10. Threshold slider Sets the point at which the compressor/limiter will begin to reduce signal level. 11. Limiter graph When the Limiter is engaged, the trace is blue.
· Threshold (A) The level at which limiting begins. · Attack time (B to C) The time it takes for the limiter to reach maximum limiting after the input exceeds the threshold level. · Ratio (A to E) The amount of limiting applied to the signal. · Release time (C to D) The time it takes for the limited signal to rise to the threshold level once the input level no longer exceeds the
threshold.
· Vertical scale = dB
12. Ratio slider Sets the ratio of input level change to output level change when the signal exceeds the threshold. 13. Attack slider Adjusts how quickly the processor reacts to a signal that exceeds the threshold. 14. Release slider Adjusts how quickly the processor stops compressing or limiting when signal falls below the Threshold.
1001108-01-E
54
Output Channel - Anti-Feedback
Available on the Main L/R and Aux outputs, these narrow, cut-only filters are used for dealing
Press AntiFeedback
OR
Home
Touch an Aux Bank
Touch an Aux Channel
or Main
Touch Anti-Feedback
Tab
with feedback.
1. Anti-Feedback tab Selects the Anti-Feedback screen
2. Filters In/Out Engages or bypasses the filters. 3. Feedback Frequency The Anti-Feedback system
automatically identifies and displays suspected feedback frequencies.
Anti Feedback
OR
Aux Outputs1-8
Inputs 1-8
Aux 1
AntiFeedback
Main Mix
15 L/R
Joe's Ears
Aux 1
Aux 2
Aux 2
Aux 3
Overview
PEQ
1
GEQ
AntiFeedback
Comp
Auxes
Presets
Setup
14
Prev Next
Scene: Default
2
Filters Out
3
In
Feedback Frequency
124 Hz
4
Manual Kill
5
Feedback Wizard
6
Reset
7
2
1
3
84
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
0
0
15
Main
16
Cue
4. Manual Kill When a suspected feedback frequency is identified, touching this button applies a filter at that frequency.
5. Feedback izard The Feedback Wizard assists in finding and cutting feedback-prone frequencies. Touching this button opens the Feedback Wizard which will guide the operator through the process.
6. Reset Sets all the Filter controls and markers to their factory default position. Note that the Feedback Wizard will only use a filter if its Cut has been set to
Aux 3
Aux 4
Aux 4
Aux 5
Aux 5
Aux 6
Aux 6
Aux 7
Aux 7
Aux 8
Aux 8
Aux 9
Aux 9
Aux 10
Aux 10
-5
10
-15
-20 20
1
50
9
2
100
200
3
4
5
-5
10
500
1K
2K
6
7
8
9
-15
-20
5K
10K
20K
10 11 12
Freq 52.1
10
Hz
Freq 37.5
Hz
Freq 70.2
Hz
Freq 132
Hz
Freq 247
Hz
Freq 462
Hz
Freq 866
Hz
Freq 1.62k
Hz
Freq 3.0k
Hz
Freq 5.7k
Hz
Freq 10.7k
Freq 20.0k
Hz
Hz
Main
L/R
10
5 L
u AF
5
10
0
20
0.0. 7. Display Shows the frequency and depth (cut) of
applied filters. · Vertical scale = dB · Horizontal scale = frequency
Aux 11
Aux 11
Aux 12
Aux 12
Aux 13
Aux 13
Aux 14
Aux 14
Cut
Cut
Cut
Cut
Cut
Cut
Cut
Cut
Cut
Cut
Cut
Cut
-15.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
11
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
% 12
Filter Depth
84
Filter Q
13
13.6
40
Mute
8. Filter markers These markers are color-coded to
correspond with their associated controls. Horizontal position indicates frequency. The amount of cut is indicated by a descending vertical line.
Twelve filters - TouchMix-30 Pro, eight filters - TouchMix-8 and -16.
NOTE!: Markers and their associated frequency controls are not tied to a specific frequency band. Marker 1 may attenuate a high frequency, while Marker 12 may attenuate a low frequency.
9. Filter In/Out The numbered buttons engage/disengage the filters. 10. Freq Sets the center frequency of a filter. 11. Cut Adjusts amount of Cut (or attenuation) for a filter. Range is from 0.00 dB to -20.0 dB. 12. Filter Depth % Increases or reduces the depth (amount of cut) for all the filters. 13. Filter Q Adjusts the width of the filter from a Q of 6 (0.05 octave) to a Q of 30 (0.24 octave). 14. / Buttons Navigates to the next or previous channel. The buttons cycle through the Input, Playback, Record, and FX channels, then
loops back to Input 1. If you start in the Auxes, the buttons cycle through the Auxiliary outputs and the Main L/R channels. 15. Channel Controls Output controls for selected channel. See Channel Controls topic. There are no controls displayed because there is no Aux
Master channel selected, only the Main L/R mix is selected. 16. Main Channel Controls Output controls for the Main L/R outputs. See Channel Controls topic.
1001108-01-E
55
only)
Output Channel - Auxes (TouchMix-30 Pro only)
Auxiliary outputs 1 through 8 may be mixed to Aux Mixes (buses) 9 through 14. In addition, the Main L/R and Sub Groups can send audio to all 14 Auxes.
1. Auxes tab Selects the Aux Sends screen 2. Aux Overview Navigates to the Aux Overview
which displays all Aux mixes for the selected Fader Bank.
3. Reset Resets all Aux Sends controls for the selected input channel, to the factory default.
4. Aux send number Displays the number of the associated Aux Output.
5. Aux master name Displays the Aux mix name. Touch to navigate to the associated Aux output controls.
6. Aux send sliders Sets the level of audio sent from the channel to the Aux output; -40 dB (-Inf) is off.
7. Nain Provides a numeric display of the Aux send level.
8. Mute Mutes the send from the channel to the associated Aux mix. Does not effect any other mixes.
9. Pick-off point Indicates if the Aux Buss is taking a Pre All / Pre Dyn/ Pre Fdr / Post All signal. Touch to navigate to the associated Aux output controls to change the setting.
Touch
Home
Aux Out 1-8
Bank
Touch Output Channel
Touch Auxes Tab
Aux Out 1-8
Inputs 1-8
Aux 1
Auxes
Main Mix L/R
Overview
PEQ
GEQ
AntiFeedback
1 Limiter
(Comp)
Auxes
Presets
Setup
Prev
Next
Scene: Default
Joe's Ears
Aux 1
Aux Sends
Aux 2
Aux 2
Aux 3
Aux 3
Aux 4
Aux 4
Aux 5
Aux 5
Aux 6
Aux 6
Aux 7
Aux 7/8
Aux 8
Aux 8
Aux 9
Aux 9
Aux 10
Aux 10
Aux 11
Aux 11
Aux 12
Aux 12
4 5
9
Aux 9
10
Aux 10
11
Aux 11
12
Aux 12
Aux 13
Aux 13
13
Aux 13
Aux 14 14
Aux 14
Aux 14
2
Aux Overview
3
Reset
Aux 1
Main
Cue
Cue
Aux
Main
1
L/R
10
10
5
5
C
L
u
u
AF
F
5 5
10 10
6-40
-20
-10
U
7 10
8
9
-inf
Mute
Pre Fdr
0
20
0
20
-40
-20
-10
U
10
-inf
Mute
Pre Fdr
-40
-20
-10
U
10
-inf
Mute
Pre Fdr
-40
-20
-10
U
10
-inf
Mute
Pre Fdr
40
40
-40
-20
-10
U
10
-inf
Mute
Pre Fdr
-40
-20
-10
U
10
-inf
Mute
Pre Fdr
Mute
Mute
1001108-01-E
56
Output Channel Presets
Output Channel - Presets
Save, recall and copy the settings associated with an Aux, Sub Group or Main L/R output channel.
Home
Touch an Aux Bank
Touch an Aux Channel
Touch the Presets
Tab
1. Presets tab Selects the Presets screen.
Aux Outputs1-8
Inputs 1-8
Aux 1
Presets
2. Current Preset Displays the name of the current active preset for the selected channel.
1
Scene:
Default
3. Save/Save As Displays a page with options
2
for naming a preset and selecting internal or USB
storage destination.
3
Aux 1
Main
15
16
4. Factory presets list Displays a list of factory
4
5
6
programmed presets. Voicings for QSC passive
loudspeakers are provided. Reset sets all output
channel's parameters to their factory default state.
7
The Reset preset is at the bottom of the list, scroll down to see.
5. Mixer presets list Up to 100 Internal Presets may be stored (saved) to and recalled from the
mixer's internal memory.
Cue
Cue
L
C
R
Aux
1
L G 48
Main
L/R
10
10
5
5
L
u
u
F
5 5
10 10
6. USB presets list Up to 100 External Presets may be stored (saved) to and recalled from an External (USB) storage device.
7. Selected preset When a preset is selected, the preset's background is highlighted blue, and the list's title is highlighted blue.
8. Delete button Select a User Preset and touch this button to delete the Preset.
0
20
0
20
89
10
8
Recall Options
11 11
12 12
Omit Levels & Assignments
Recall
1313
Omit Name
1414
Omit Phantom
40
40
Mute
Mute
9. Copy to USB button Copy the selected Preset to a connected USB drive.
10. Copy to Mixer button Copy the selected Preset to the Internal Mixer storage.
11. Recall button Recalls stored output channel settings including EQ, limiter, filter, mute assignments, DCA assignments, link state. Levels and tuning settings may be recalled or omitted (see 12 and 13 below).
12. Omit Levels & Assignments switch When set to On, recalling the preset will not change any levels or assignments to Mute, DCA or Sub groups.
13. Omit Tuning switch When set to On, recalling the preset will not change the anti-feedback tuning settings.
14. Omit Phantom When set to On, recalling the preset will not change the Phantom Power settings.
15. Channel controls Output controls for selected channel. See Channel Controls topic.
16. Main Channel controls Output controls for the Main L/R outputs. See Channel Controls topic.
1001108-01-E
57
Output Channel - Setup / Delay
Various utility setup functions for Aux and Main output channels.
Home
Touch Aux Output Bank
Touch an Aux Channel
OR Touch Main
Touch Setup
1. Setup Tab Selects the Setup screen
2. Channel Name Displays the channel name. Touch to display a keyboard and rename the output.
3. Link (Auxes only) Links adjacent channels. Odd numbered channel settings are copied to the even numbered channel. Pan settings are mirrored. Only odd > even linking is supported.
4. Reset Returns Setup parameters to factory default values.
Main Mix L/R
Joe's Ears
Aux 1
Aux 2
Aux 2
Aux 3
Aux 3
AAuuxxOOuutptpuutst1s1-8-8
Inputss11--88
Aux 14 OR SeMtuapin
Setup
Overview
PEQ
GEQ
2
Aux
Aux 4
AntiFeedback
Comp
Auxes
3
Link
1
Presets
Setup
4
Reset
Prev
Next
Scene: Default
Main
Main
Ampli ers
6 QSC Ampli er and Speaker Settings
E Series
K Series
K2 Series
KLA Series
KW Series
Cue
Cue
5. Aux Pick-Off (Auxes only) Determines where the aux signal is taken from the input channel signal flow. The selections are: Pre Fdr (default)/ Post Fdr / Pre Dyn / Pre All.
6. QSC Amplifier and Speaker Settings Displays tools to assist in optimizing gain structure and other parameters for selected QSC amplifiers and loudspeakers.
7. Delay In Engages or disengages the Delay.
8. Delay Displays and controls the output delay. Readouts are provided in milliseconds, feet, and meters.
9. Channel Safe During Scene Recall Setting this switch to Safe prevents channel settings from being changed when a Scene is recalled.
10. Connector Mode (TouchMix-16 only) Converts auxes 7/8 and 9/10 from stereo outputs with unbalanced TRS jack to mono, balanced outputs. Default is Stereo Mode.
Aux 4
Aux 4
Aux 5
Aux 5
Aux 6
Aux 6
Aux 7
Aux 7
Aux 8
Aux 8
Aux 9
Aux 9
Aux 10
Aux 10
Aux 11
Aux 11
Aux 12
Aux 12
Aux 13
Aux 13
Aux 14
Aux 14
7
In
Units
8
13.5
feet
12.0
ms
Channel Safe
10 Connector Mode
Aux
During Scene Recall
9
Recallable
Stereo
4
Mono (Bal)
4.1
meters
L
AF
5 Aux Pick-O
Pre Fader
Post Fader
Pre Dynamics
Pre All
Main
L/R
10
10
5
5
L
u AF
5
5
10
10
Assignments
Main L/R
0
0
20
11 DCA 1
DCA 1
DCA 2 DCA 2
DCA 3 DCA 3
DCA 4 DCA 4
DCA 5 DCA 5
DCA 6 DCA 6
DCA 7 DCA 7
DCA 8 DCA 8
12 Mute 1
Mute 1
Mute 2 Mute 2
Mute 3 Mute 3
Mute 4 Mute 4
Mute 5 Mute 5
Mute 6 Mute 6
Mute 7 Mute 7
Mute 8 Mute 8
40
40
Mute
Mute
11. DCA Nroup Assignments Select the DCA Groups this channel is to be part of. User-assigned names display on the buttons. See the DCA Groups topic.
12. Mute Nroup Assignments Select the Mute Groups this channel is to be part of. User-assigned names display on the buttons. See the Mute Groups topic.
1001108-01-E
58
Output Speaker Settings
Provides Gain setting recommendations for QSC powered loudspeakers. Also provides a list of available loudspeaker presets for various applications on both powered and passive loudspeakers. Note that these presets are not available for all QSC loudspeakers.
1. Select Speaker Touch to select the QSC loudspeaker connected to the output.
2. Preset Select a preset for the connected loudspeaker.
a. If you are using a powered loudspeaker make sure the DSP is set to the default preset.
b. If you are using an E Series (passive) loudspeaker make sure that any DSP in the amplifier is set to the default preset. The QSC GXD amplifier has a setting for TouchMix mixers. Refer to the GXD topic.
3. Set the Nain Adjust the Gain knob on your powered loudspeaker to the position indicated by the illustration and the text below it.
4. When finished, touch the Done button.
Aux Out 1 - 8
Inputs 1-8
Press Home
Touch an Output Bank
Aux 1
K Series
Touch an Output Channel
Touch K Series
Select QSC Speaker Model and Preset Name to display Gain Settings or Recall a Preset
2 Model K8.2
3 Preset Name Dance
K10.2
0dB
K10.2 K12.2
Floor Monitor Live Bright
Live
Studio
1
Vocal Monitor
OFF
+10dB
GAIN
Done
Recall Preset
Rotate Gain knob 5 detents (clicks) past zero.
NOTE!: Subwoofer level may be adjusted to get the desired relative high/low balance. When the speakers are adjusted as directed, signal to noise ratio is optimized and the output meters on the mixer reflect how much speaker system headroom is available. Note that the LIMIT LED on the speakers is not a Clip indicator. It will be lit before the mixer's meters indicate any overdrive. This is because the speakers' DSP is preventing dynamic peaks in the program from overdriving the amplifier and speakers.
NXD Amp Settings
Provides help in properly adjusting QSC GXD Amplifier when used with the TouchMix.
On the GXD Amplifier
1. Home If the amplifier's Gain screen is not displayed, press the Home button. If the Gain screen is displayed, skip to the next step.
2. Adjust the Gain A and Gain B knobs for 0.0 dB gain. Enter Moves to the next screen.
3. Adjust the Gain B/DSP Control knob to select Stereo DSP. Enter Moves to the next screen.
4. Adjust the Gain B/DSP Control knob to select Sensitivity. Enter Moves to the next screen.
5. Adjust the Gain B/DSP Control knob to select TouchMix. Enter Confirms selection.
6. Home Returns to the Home screen.
On the TouchMix
1. Done Closes the GXD Amp Settings pop-up.
Press Home
Touch an Output Bank
Aux Out 1 - 8
Inputs 1-8
Aux 1
Touch an Output Channel
Ampli ers
QSC GXD Ampli er Settings
Navigate to "Home" Gain A 0.0 dB Gain B 0.0 dB
HOMEE ENTER
Gain B
STEREO DSP ENTER
Gain B
SENSITIVITY ENTER
Touch Amplifiers
Gain B
TOUCHMIX ENTER
HOME
Done
1001108-01-E
59
Aux Overview
Provides an overview of all the Aux mixes.
Press Aux
The Aux Send and Output levels may be adjusted on screen or, for greater precision, by touching turning the Master Control or using the buttons on your tablet device.
Aux
Main Mix L/R
Inputs 1-8
1
Inputs 9-16
1
Inputs 17-24
Stereo In/2-Trk
FX Masters
1
Aux Out 1-8
1
Aux Out 9-14
Sub Groups
1
DCA Groups
Scene: Default
(TouchMix-30 Pro only) When the Aux Overview is displayed, the Nav Strip display "grays out" the Aux Out 9-14 and DCA Groups miniature fader banks. This is because neither of these banks contains a signal that's available on any auxiliary mix. See the Aux Mix on Faders topic for more information on Auxiliary and Matrix mixes.
1. Input, FX Master and Sub Nroup banks are selectable on the Nav Strip.
2. Each column (In 1, In 2) represents a channel, and displays the channel's Aux Sends and pan controls.
Joe's Monitor
Aux 1
Aux 2
Aux 2
Aux 3
Aux 3
Aux 4
Aux 4
Aux 5
Aux 5/6
Aux 7
2
Aux 7
Aux 8
Aux 8
Aux 9
6
4
3
7
5
Aux 9
NOTE!: If an input has been given a
Aux 10
name, the name will be displayed as the
Aux 10
Aux 11
column heading. Touch the Select (name)
Aux 11
button to navigate to the input
Aux 12
channel's controls.
Aux 12
Aux 13
Aux 13
Aux 14
3. Each row represents an Aux mix, the name of the
Aux 14
mix is displayed in the first column and with the
Master fader.
4. Stereo Aux Master Slider A single slider is provided for a stereo linked Aux pair.
5. Pan Control Slider Pans the input between the left and right sides of a stereo aux mix.
6. Pre Fdr/ Post Fdr / Pre Dyn / Pre All Indicates the Aux Pick-off point that was set on the Aux Channel Setup tab.
7. Aux Master Fader Adjusts the overall level of an Aux mix.
NOTE!: User defined names display in the left column.
1001108-01-E
60
Sub Groups (TouchMix-30 Pro only)
Sub Nroup - Overview
Provides a single-screen view of frequently used controls and indicators for the Sub Groups.
1. Overview tab Selects the Sub Group Overview screen.
2. Preset Shows the currently selected Preset for this sub group. Cannot be changed from this screen.
3. Reset Sets all controls for the sub group to the factory default position.
4. L/R Subs Indicates whether or not the sub group is assigned to the Main output.
5. Parametric EQ Nraph A graphic representation of the equalization curve based on the EQ settings. The trace dims to indicate that the EQ is Out (disengaged).
· EQ Nraph Vertical Scale Represents audio level from -20 dB to +20 dB.
· EQ Nraph Horizontal Scale Represents frequency from 20 Hz to 20 kHz.
6. EQ In Engages / disengages the equalizer for the sub group.
7. Aux Sends · Displays the system numbers and user-defined names for the Aux channels.
· Adjustable sliders send signal to the associated Aux channel output.
Press
Touch Sub
Touch a Sub
Touch
Home
Group Bank
Group
Overview Tab
Sub Groups
Inputs 1-8
Sub 1
Overview
Main Mix
1
L/R
Overview
EQ
Scene:
Default
Comp
FX
Auxes
Presets
Setup
Prev Next
Joe's Ears
Aux 1
2
Preset Ele Gtr Dyn Rock 1
3
Reset
Sub 1
Main
Aux 2
Aux 2
L/R Subs
4
L/R
Aux 3
Aux 3
Aux 4
Aux 4
Aux 5
Aux 5
EQ 5
20
10 11
0
2
38
44
6
AUX Sends 7
20
1 Joe's Aux
10
5
66
2 Aux 2
0
3 Aux 3
Aux 6
Aux 6
-10
-20
20Hz
50
100
200
500
1K
2K
-10
-20
4 Aux 4
5K
10K 20K
9 Aux 7
Aux 7
1
2
3
4
5
6
5 Aux 5
10
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
Aux 8
11 Aux 8
120
80.0
200
12 500
1.0k
3.0k
8.0k
8.0k
6 Aux 6
11
Aux 9
Aux 9
Aux 10
Aux 10
Aux 11
Aux 11
Aux 12
Aux 12
Aux 13
Aux 13
Aux 14
Aux 14
Comp
Threshold -12.0
Attack 16.0
Release 50.0
Ratio 4.0
Gain 0.00
13
G.R.
FX Sends
14
1 Mono Delay
2 Lush Reverb
3 Dense Reverb
4 Pitch Shift
5 Mono Delay
6 Lush Reverb
7 Aux 7
8 Aux 8 9 Aux 9 10 Aux 10
15
11 Aux 11 12 Aux 12 13 Aux 13 14 Aux 14
LCR
Cue
Cue
ML
C
R
M Sub
M1
M
ML G
M 48
M
Main
L/R
10
10
5
5
L
u
u
F
5 5
10 10
0
20
0
20
M
M
LR
40
40
M
M
M
Mute M
Mute
· Mute indicates if the channel's send to an Aux is muted or not.
8. EQ Handles Touch, hold, and drag to change the Frequency and Gain of the associated EQ band. The frequency band button must be engaged to see the EQ Handles.
9. Low and High Cut Filter and Frequency Bands 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 These buttons engage or disengage the associated filter.
To adjust the following parameters, select the field then use the Master encoder or the up/down nudge buttons on a mobile device.
10. Nain, Bands 16 Displays and adjusts gain (+/- 15 dB) of the frequency band. 11. Low and High Cut Filter Frequency Displays and adjusts the knee frequency for the high and low cut filters. 12. Frequency Bands 16 frequency adjustment fields Displays and adjusts the center frequency for the four parametric EQ bands. 13. Comp
· Comp Engages or disengages the channel's dynamics processor. · Threshold Displays and sets the level at which compression/limiting begins. · Attack Displays and sets the time it takes for the compressor/limiter to reach its maximum compression when the threshold level is
exceeded. · Release Displays and sets the time it takes for the compressor/limiter to cease gain reduction when signal drops below threshold. · Ratio Displays and sets the amount of compression applied to the signal. · Nain Displays and sets the overall output gain to makeup any loss after the signal is compressed. · N .R . Gain reduction meter shows the amount of compression applied to the signal. 14. FX Sends · Displays the system numbers and user-defined names for the FX channels. · Adjustable sliders send signal from this channel to the associated FX processors. 15. Aux Number & Name Displays the system numbers and user-defined names for the Aux mixes.
1001108-01-E
61
Sub Nroup - PEQ (TouchMix-30 Pro only)
Press
Touch a Sub
Touch a
Touch the
Home
Group Bank
Sub Group
EQ Tab
Controls and displays the settings for the Sub Group parametric equalization.
Sub Groups
Sub 1
EQ
Inputs 1-8
1. EQ tab Selects the PEQ screen. 2. PEQ In/Out switch Engages / disengages the
equalizer.
NOTE!: When the RTA is off, the Parametric EQ graph expands to use the entire graph area.
3. RTA On button Turns the RTA (Real-time Analyzer) on and off.
4. Simple button Hides the Low Cut, High Cut, Frequency, and BW controls. Does not effect existing settings.
5. Reset button Sets all EQ controls to factory default values.
6. RTA graph Displays the amplitude of the channel signal in 1/3 octave bands. Peak hold is displayed only on tablet devices.
7. Parametric EQ graph A graphic representation of the equalization curve based on the EQ settings. The trace dims to indicate that the EQ is Out (disengaged).
Main Mix L/R
1
Overview
EQ
2 Joe's Ears
Aux 1
PEQ Out
In
Aux 2
Aux 2
Aux 3
Aux 3
Aux 4
Aux 4
Aux 5
Aux 5
Aux 6
Aux 6
6 -5
-15 -30
-45 -60
31.5
7
Aux 7
Aux 7
1
Aux 8
Aux 8
Aux 9
Aux 9
Aux 10
Aux 10
Aux 11
Aux 11
Aux 12
Aux 12
Aux 13
Aux 13
Aux 14
Aux 14
9 10 20Hz
1
Low Cut
12 Gain 0.00
dB
dB
15 Freq 120
13 Freq 80.0
Hz
Hz
Hz
14 Q
1.00
Comp
2 3
16
Scene: Default
FX
Auxes
Presets
Setup
3
4
RTA On
Simple
5
Reset
Prev Next Sub 1
Main
17
18
-5
Cue
-15
Cue
-30
L
C
R
-45
Sub
1
Main
L/R
10
10
5
5
C
L
5
6
u
u
F
AF
8
0
5
5
4 10
10
10 9 0
20
0
20
2
3 11 4
5
6
Gain 0.00
dB
Freq 200
Hz
Q 1.00
Gain 0.00
dB
Freq 500
Hz
Q 1.00
Gain 0.00
dB
Freq 1.00k
Hz
Q 1.00
Gain 0.00
dB
Freq 3.0k
Hz
Q 1.00
Gain High Cut 0.00
15 Freq
Freq
8.0k
8.0K
LR
40
12
34
56
78
Q
Hz
1.00
Mute
40
Mute
· EQ graph vertical scale Represents audio level from -20 dB to +20 dB.
· EQ graph horizontal scale Represents frequency from 20 Hz to 20 kHz.
8. EQ Handles Touch, hold, and drag to change the Frequency and Gain of the associated EQ band. The frequency band button must be engaged to see the EQ Handles.
9. Low and High Cut Filter buttons These filters cut frequencies below or above the frequency set by the corresponding Freq control.
10. Low and High Shelf Filter buttons Changes EQ Band 1 and Band 6 from parametric filters to shelving filters. When a shelf filter is engaged, the Bandwidth control is not available.
11. Frequency Bands 1 - 6 In/Out Engages / disengages the associated parametric EQ band.
12. Nain knob Adjusts and displays the gain at the frequency setting of the associated EQ band. Range of -15 dB to +15 dB.
13. Freq knob Adjusts and displays the center frequency of the associated EQ band. The range is 20 Hz to 20 kHz for all bands. If the Shelving filter is engaged, the Freq control sets the knee frequency of the shelf filter.
14. Q knob Adjusts the bandwidth of the associated EQ band. When the Shelf Filter is selected, the Bandwidth control is hidden. In addition to the Q knob, you can use a two-finger pinch / zoom to control the Q.
15. Freq knob (Low and High Cut) Sets the knee frequency of the low and/or high cut filter as measured from a point 3 dB below 0 or unity.
16.
buttons Navigates to the next or previous sub group. The buttons cycle through the Input, Playback, Record, and FX channels, then
loops back to Input 1.
17. Sub Nroup controls Output controls for selected Sub Group.
18. Main Channel controls Output controls for the Main L/R outputs. See Channel Controls topic.
1001108-01-E
62
only)
Sub Nroup - Compressor / Limiter (TouchMix-30 Pro only)
Touch
Home
an Input
Bank
Touch a Channel
Touch the Comp Tab
The Compressor reduces the dynamic range of a signal above a set Threshold. When set as a Limiter, prevents the audio level from exceeding a pre-set threshold.
Main Mix L/R
Sub Groups
Inputs 1-8
Sub 1
Overview
EQ
Comp
1
Scene: Default
Comp
FX
Auxes
Presets
Setup
Prev Next
NOTE!: Compressor and Limiter have similar controls. Some of the labels and the color of the trace will differ.
1. Comp tab Selects the Compressor screen.
Joe's Ears
Aux 1
Aux 2
Aux 2
Aux 3
Aux 3
Aux 4
Aux 4
2
Comp Out
In
7 In
Threshold 11
-33.3 dB
3
Comp
Limiter
8 G.R.
4
5
6
Knee In
Simple
Reset
9 Out
Ratio 2.1:1
Sub 1
Cue
L
C
R
Main
Cue
2. Comp In / Out Engages and disengages the compressor.
3. Comp / Limiter Changes the function of this screen between the Compressor and the Limiter.
4. Knee In The knee determines whether
the compressor/limiter
transitions abruptly or gradually as the
Knee
threshold is crossed.
In
Out
5. Simple Turns Simple
mode on and off. Hides all controls except:
Aux 5
Aux 5
Aux 6
Aux 6
Aux 7
Aux 7
Aux 8
Aux 8
Aux 9
Aux 9
Aux 10
Aux 10
Aux 11
Aux 11
Aux 12
Aux 12
Aux 13
Aux 13
10 BC
E
Attack
6.3 ms
13
D
A
Release
175 ms
14
Sub
Main
12 1
L/R
10
10
16
5
5
C
L
u
u
F
5 5
10 10
Gain
00.0 dB
15
0
20
0
20
LR
40
40
12
34
56
78
· Comp (Limiter) In
Aux 14
Aux 14
· Comp / Limiter
Mute
Mute
· Simple
· Reset
· Compression (Limiting)
6. Reset Sets all the Comp controls to their factory default position.
7. In meter RMS input level
8. N .R . meter Gain Reduction (red) indicates how much the signal is being reduced by the compressor.
9. Out meter Output level after any applied compression
10. Threshold Sets the point at which the compressor will begin to reduce signal level.
11. Compressor graph Vertical scale from 0 dB to -60 dB; horizontal measurement is time. When the Compressor is engaged, the trace is displayed.
· Threshold (A) The level at which compression begins.
· Attack time (B to C) The time it takes for the compression to reach maximum compression after the input exceeds the threshold level.
· Ratio (A to E) The amount of compression applied to the signal.
· Release time (C to D) The time it takes for the compressed signal to rise to the threshold level once the input level no longer exceeds the threshold.
12. Ratio Sets the ratio of input level change to output level change when the signal exceeds the threshold.
13. Attack Adjusts how quickly the compressor reacts to a signal that exceeds the threshold.
14. Release Adjusts how quickly the compressor stops compressing when signal falls below threshold.
15. Nain (Compressor only) Adjusts the overall output gain to makeup any loss after the signal is compressed.
16. Compressor indicator When the Compressor is In, an orange "C" displays on the channel controls strip. The Limiter displays a blue "L".
1001108-01-E
63
Sub Nroups - FX Sends (TouchMix-30 Pro only)
Controls how much of the Sub Group audio is sent to the FX devices.
Sub Groups
Inputs 1-8
Home
Sub 1
FX
Touch Sub Groups Bank
Touch Channel
Touch FX Tab
1. FX tab Selects the FX Sends screen. 2. FX Overview button Navigates to the FX Overview
screen for a view of all 6 FX sends from all inputs.
3. Simple Hides the Global FX Parameters for a simpler setup.
4. Reset Resets the FX sliders, Pre/Post settings, and the Pitch Correct settings. This button does not reset the settings for the FX processors including the Global FX Parameters on this screen.
5. FX Buses The icon indicates what processor has been selected for an FX mix. Touch the icon to navigate to the processor.
6. FX Label The larger text identifies the FX bus 1 6, and does not change. The smaller text can be changed in the FX processor Setup screen.
7. FX Send sliders Sets the level of audio "sent" from the channel to the FX mix; "-inf" is off. The digital read-out to the right of the slider indicates the slider setting.
8. Nlobal FX Parameters Provides control over the two most important parameters of the selected FX device. The controls are different depending on the
Main Mix L/R
Overview
EQ
1
Comp
FX
Auxes
Presets
Setup
Prev
Next
Scene: Default
Joe's Monitor
Aux 1
Aux 2
Aux 2
Aux 3
Aux 3
Aux 4
Aux 4
Aux 5
Aux 5
Aux 6
Aux 6
Aux 7
Aux 7
Aux 8
Aux 8
Aux 9
Aux 9
Aux 10
Aux 10
Aux 11
Aux 11
Aux 12
Aux 12
Aux 13
Aux 13
Aux 14
Aux 14
FX Buses
5 Chorus
Dense Reverb Lush Reverb Mono Delay
None Basic Chorus
6
FX 1 Joe's FX
-40
7
-20
-10
FX 2 FX 2
-40
-20
-10
FX 3 FX 3
-40
-20
-10
FX 4 FX 4
-40
-20
-10
FX 5 FX 5
-40
-20
-10
FX 6 FX 6
-40
-20
-10
Key
2
FX Overview
3
4
Simple
Reset
Sub 1
Main
Global FX Parameters
Pre/Post Fader
Cue
Cue
U
10
8Hz
Rate
8
9
Depth
-11.5
2.3
0.63
Pre
L
C
R
U
10
-23.0
Sec Rev Time 34.0
mSec Initial Delay 0.00
Post
Sub
1
U
10
-inf
m
Size
mSec Pre Delay
CL
1.43
0.5
Pre
U
10
48
mSec Delay
% Regen
-inf
1.7
0.5
Pre
Main
L/R
10
10
5
5
L
u
u
F
5 5
10 10
U
10
-inf
Param 1 32
0
20
0
20
Param 2
0.00
Pre
LR
40
40
12
U
10
Hz
Rate
Depth
34
-inf
1.5
0.5
Pre
56
78
E
Blend Amount
20%
Correct Rate
8.3
Dry
Wet
Slow
Fast
Mute
Mute
selected processor.
9. Pre/Post fader Selects a pre-fader or post-fader (default) pick-off point for the FX send. Changing this setting will change the pick-off for all inputs.
1001108-01-E
64
Sub Nroup - Auxes (TouchMix-30 Pro only)
Touch the
Touch a
Touch the
Home
Sub Groups
Sub Group
Auxes
Bank
Channel
Tab
Sub Groups may be sent to Auxiliary Mixes. An Aux may be used to output a single Sub Group or as a matrix to mix multiple Sub Groups.
1. Auxes tab Selects the Aux Sends screen 2. Aux Overview Navigates to the Aux Overview
which displays all Aux mixes on a single screen.
3. Reset Resets all Aux Sends controls, for the selected input channel, to the factory default.
4. Aux send system number Displays the number of the associated Aux Output.
5. Aux Mix name Displays the Aux mix name. Touch to navigate to the associated Aux output controls.
6. Aux send sliders Sets the level of audio sent from the channel to the Aux output; -40 dB (-Inf) is off.
7. Nain readout Provides a numeric display of the Aux send level.
8. Mute button Mutes the send from the channel to the associated Aux mix. Does not effect any other mixes.
9. Pick-off point Indicates if the Aux Buss is taking a Pre Fdr/ Post Fdr / Pre Dyn / Pre All signal. Touch to navigate to the associated Aux output setup screen to change the setting.
Main Mix L/R
Sub Groups
Inputs 1-8
Sub 1
Overview
EQ
Joe's Ears
Aux 1
Aux 2
Aux 2
Aux 3
Aux 3
Aux 4
Aux 4
Aux 5
Aux 5
Aux 6
Aux 6
Aux 7
Aux 7/8
Aux 9
Aux 9
Aux 10
Aux 10
Aux 11
Aux 11
Aux 12
Aux 12
Aux 13
Aux 13
Aux 14
Aux 14
Aux Sends
4 1
5 Joe's Aux
2
Aux 2
3
Aux 3
4
Aux 4
5
Aux 5
6
Aux 6
7
Aux 7
10
8
Aux 8
9
Aux 9
10
Aux 10
11
Aux 11
12
Aux 12
13
Aux 13
14
Aux 14
Auxes
Limiter (Comp)
1
FX
Auxes
Presets
Setup
2
Aux Overview
3
Reset
Prev
Next
Scene: Default
Sub 1
Main
6-40
-40 -40
-20
-10
U
-20
-10
U
-20
-10
U
-40
-20
-10
U
-40
-20
-10
U
-40
-20
-10
U
-40
-20
-10
U
11 C
7 8 9 10
-3.0
Mute
Pre Fdr
10
-28.0
Mute
Post Fdr
10
-3.0
Mute
Pre Dyn
10
-12.0
Mute
Pre All
10
-inf
Mute
Pre Fdr
10
-inf
Mute
Pre Fdr
10
-inf
Mute
Pre Fdr
Cue
Cue
L
C
R
Sub
1
L
Main
L/R
10
10
5
5
L
u
u
AF
5
5
10 10
-40
-20
-10
U
10
-inf
Mute
Pre Fdr
0
20
0
20
-40
-20
-10
U
10
-inf
Mute
Pre Fdr
-40
-20
-10
U
10
-inf
Mute
Pre Fdr
L/R
40
40
-40
-20
-10
U
10
-inf
Mute
Pre Fdr
-40
-20
-10
U
10
-inf
Mute
Pre Fdr
-40
-20
-10
U
10
-inf
Mute
Pre Fdr
Mute
Mute
10. Aux link indicator Indicates the Aux channels are linked. Aux channels may be linked or unlinked from an Aux Output Setup screen.
11. Aux sends pan-slider Pans the signal between a linked pair of auxes.
1001108-01-E
65
Sub Nroup - Presets (TouchMix-30 Pro only)
Recall presets for the selected Sub Group channel.
1. Presets tab Selects the Presets screen. 2. Current Preset Displays the name of the
currently active preset (if any). 3. Save / Save As button Displays a page with
options for naming a scene and selecting internal or USB storage destination. 4. Factory list Displays a list of the factory programmed presets available for the sub group. 5. Mixer (internal) list Displays a list of presets that have been stored to Internal mixer memory. 6. USB (external) list Displays a list of presets that have been saved on an External (USB) drive. 7. Delete button Deletes a selected preset from Internal or External user memory. 8. Copy to USB button Copies the selected preset to an external USB Drive. 9. Copy to Mixer button Copies the selected preset to the internal mixer memory. 10. Recall button Recalls the selected preset. 11. Omit Levels switch When Omit Levels is On, recalling a preset will not affect any Sub Group levels.
Sub Groups
Inputs 1-8
2
Press Home
Touch Sub Groups
Touch a Sub Group Channel
Sub 1
Presets
1
3
4
5
6
Touch Presets
7
8
9
7
10 11
1001108-01-E
66
Sub Nroup - Setup (TouchMix-30 Pro only)
Rename the Sub Channel, assign Input channels to the group, and assign/unassign the group to the Main L/R.
1. Setup tab Selects the Sub Group Setup screen. 2. Name Touch the Name to display a keyboard that
may be used to enter a name for the channel. 3. Link Touch the Link button to link the channel with
the adjacent channel. Always links odd to even. 4. Reset Returns settings to the factory default. 5. No/Yes Select "Yes" to automatically unassign an
input channel from the Main L/R when it is assigned to the Sub Group. 6. Input Channel numbering, both system (1) and user assigned (In 1).
7. L/R assigned L/R Indicates the Sub Group is assigned to the Main L/R outputs.
8. L/R unassigned L/R Indicates the Sub Group is not assigned to the Main L/R outputs.
9. Main L/R assignment button Assigns and unassigns this Sub Group to the Main L/R outputs.
Sub Groups
Inputs 1-8
Press Menu
Sub 1
Setup
Touch FX Masters
2
3
Touch an FX Channel
1 4
Touch Setup
5 6
7
8
9
1001108-01-E
67
2-Trk Playback
2- Track playback controls a digital, stereo audio input signal. Depending on the Recording Mode selected, this signal may be from a USB multitrack session, a DAW (TouchMix-30 Pro only) or from MP3 files stored on the root directory of a USB drive.
2-Trk Playback - Overview
Provides a single-screen view of frequently used
controls and indicators for the MP3 Audio Player
and the 2-Track PB channel. The settings made here
affect both MP3 and 2-Track audio.
Press
Rec/Play 1. Overview tab Selects the Channel Overview
screen.
Rec/
Play
2. Preset Shows the currently selected Preset for
this channel. Touch + to change the Preset.
Touch Recording
Mode
Recording Mode
Press Rec/ Play
Touch Recording
Mode OR
Touch Stereo MP3
Touch
Touch
Multitrack OR Multitrack
USB Drive
DAW
Stereo MP3
USB Drive Playback
Overview
Touch Stereo In / 2Trk
Touch 2-Trk PB
OR
Touch Overview
Touch Overview
3. Reset button Sets all controls for the playback channel to the factory default position.
Rec/ Play
Recording Mode
Multitrack
USB Drive
OORR
Multitrack
DAW
Stereo In/2-Trk
2-Trk PB
Overview
4. Assigned To Indicates the output assignment channel L/R Main or not. Change in Setup.
5. Parametric EQ graph A graphic representation of the equalization curve based on the EQ settings. The trace dims to indicate that the EQ is Out (disengaged).
· EQ Nraph vertical scale Represents audio level from -20 dB to +20 dB.
· EQ Nraph horizontal scale Represents frequency from 20 Hz to 20 kHz.
6. Out/In Engages / disengages the equalizer for the MP3 and 2-Track PB channel.
7. EQ Handles Touch, hold, and drag to change the Frequency and Gain of the associated EQ band. The frequency band button must be engaged to see the EQ Handles.
8. Mute Indicates the Mute groups to which this channel is assigned.
9. Aux Sends
· Displays the system numbers and userdefined names for the Aux channels.
Main Mix
1
L/R
Overview
EQ
E ect
Joe's Monitor
Aux 1
Aux 2
Aux 2
Aux 3
Aux 3
Aux 4
Aux 4
Aux 5
Aux 5
Aux 6
Aux 6
Aux 7
Aux 7
Aux 8
Aux 8
Aux 9
Aux 9
Aux 10
Aux 10
Aux 11
Aux 11
Aux 12
Aux 12
Aux 13
Aux 13
Aux 14
Aux 14
2 5
10 11
4 7
1
12 13
Auxes
Presets
Setup
Prev
Next
Scene: Default
3
2-Trk PB
Main
6
2
14
Cue
Cue
8
L
C
R
9
Playback
Main
PB
L/R
10
10
5
5
L
L
u AF
u
G
5
15
5
48
10
10
0
20
0
20
40
40
Mute
Mute
· Adjustable sliders send signal to the associated Aux channel output.
· Mute indicates if the channel's send to an Aux is muted or not.
10. Low Cut Filter and Shelf Filters 1 and 2 buttons These buttons engage or disengage the associated filter.
NOTE!: To adjust the following parameters, select the field then use the Master encoder or the up/down nudge buttons on a mobile device.
11. Frequency, Low-Cut Filter Displays and adjusts the knee frequency for the low cut filter. 12. Nain, Shelf Filters 1 and 2 Displays and adjusts gain (+/- 15 dB) of the shelf filter. 13. Frequency, Shelf Filters 1and 2 Displays and adjusts the frequency for both shelf filters. 14. Aux number & name Displays the system numbers and user-defined names for the Aux mixes. 15. M Indicates if the FX channel send to the Aux mix is muted. You can change this in the FX Masters Auxes tab.
1001108-01-E
68
2-Trk PB EQ
2-Trk PB (2-track playback) provides equalization for 2-Track audio from a previous TouchMix session or MP3 files stored on a USB device.
1. EQ tab Displays the Audio Player EQ controls. 2. PEQ switch Enables (In) / bypasses (Out) the
Press Rec/Play
equalizer.
Rec/
3. RTA On Enables / disables the Real Time Analyzer.
Play
Touch Recording
Mode
Recording Mode
Press Rec/ Play
Touch Recording
Mode OR
Touch Stereo MP3
Touch EQ
Touch
Touch
Multitrack OR Multitrack
USB Drive
DAW
Stereo MP3
USB Drive Playback
EQ
Touch Stereo In / 2Trk
Touch 2-Trk PB
Touch EQ
NOTE!: A maximum of two RTA displays for TouchMix-30 Pro, and one RTA display for the TouchMix-8 and -16 are available at a time on any combination of a mixer and tablet devices.
NOTE!: When the RTA is off, the Parametric EQ graph expands to use the entire graph area.
4. Reset button Sets all the EQ controls to their factory default position.
5. RTA Display Displays the amplitude of the channel signal in 1/3 octave bands.
NOTE!: Peak hold is displayed only on tablet devices.
6. EQ graph A graphic representation of the EQ settings.
7. EQ Handles Touch, hold, and drag to change the Frequency and Gain of the associated EQ band. The frequency band button must be engaged to see the EQ Handles.
Rec/ Play
Recording Mode
OR
Multitrack
USB Drive
OORR
Multitrack
DAW
Main Mix L/R
1
Overview
EQ
Joe's Monitor
2
Aux 1
Aux 2
Aux 2
5
Aux 3
Aux 3
Aux 4
Aux 4
Aux 5
Aux 5
Aux 6
6
Aux 6
Aux 7
Aux 7
Aux 8
Aux 8
Aux 9
Aux 9
Aux 10
Aux 10
8
Aux 11
Aux 11
Aux 12
Aux 12
Aux 13
11
Aux 13
Aux 14
Aux 14
Audio Player
7
1
10 11
Stereo In/2-Trk
2-Trk PB
EQ
Auxes
Presets
Setup
3
4
Prev
Next
Scene: Default
2-Trk PB
Main
2
9 10 11
Cue
Cue
L
C
R
Playback
PB
Main
L/R
10
10
5
5
L
L
u AF
u
G
5
5
48
10
10
0
20
0
20
40
40
Mute
Mute
8. Low Cut filter button This filter cuts frequencies below the frequency set by the corresponding Freq control.
9. Bands 1 & 2 button Engages / disables the low and high shelf filters.
10. Nain knob Adjusts the gain of the associated shelf filter over a range of -15 dB to +15 dB.
11. Frequency knob Sets the center, or shelving, frequency of the associated EQ band.
1001108-01-E
69
2-Trk Playback Audio Player
Plays MP3 audio files from a USB memory device.
Press Rec/ Play
Touch Recording
Mode
NOTE!: Make sure the Sample Rate set in
Rec/ Play
Recording Mode
Stereo MP3
USB Drive Playback
Audio Player
the Mixer Setup matches the sample rate
of the MP3 file.
Touch Stereo MP3
Touch Audio Player
1. Audio Player tab touch to display Audio Player controls.
2. MP3 Songs Displays a list of MP3 titles on the inserted USB drive.
3. MP3 Displays title of currently selected MP3 file. 4. Top-of-List Touch to move to the beginning of the
file list.
5. Previous file Touch to move to the previous file in the file list.
6. Play Touch to begin playback of the currently selected MP3 file.
7. Next file Touch to move to the next file in the file list.
8. Stop Play Touch to stop playback of the currently selected MP3 file.
9. Playback Time Indicates elapsed time since beginning playback.
10. Recording Mode Touch to change from MP3 Playback mode to either Multitrack USB Drive or Multitrack DAW.
11. 00:00:00 Represents the start of the file.
12. Progress Line indicates the approximate playback position in the file.
13. HH:MM:SS Indicates the length of the file.
1001108-01-E
70
2-Trk Playback - Auxes
Auxiliary outputs are used to create a mix for stage monitors, in ear monitors, remote speakers or video / broadcast.
1. Auxes tab Selects the Aux Sends screen
2. Aux Overview button Navigates to the Aux Overview which displays all Aux mixes on a single screen.
Press Rec/Play
Rec/ Play
3. Reset button Resets all Aux Sends controls, for the selected input channel, to the factory default.
4. Aux send system number Displays the number Rec/ Play of the associated Aux Output.
5. Aux master name Displays the Aux mix name. Touch to navigate to the associated Aux output controls.
6. Aux send sliders Sets the level of audio sent from the channel to the Aux output; -40 dB (-Inf) is off.
Main Mix L/R
Joe's Ears
Aux 1
Aux 2
Aux 2
Aux 3
Aux 3
7. Nain Provides a numeric display of the Aux
Aux 4
Aux 4
send level.
Aux 5
8. Mute Mutes the send from the channel to the
Aux 5
Aux 6
assiciated Aux mix. Does not effect any other mixes. Aux6
9. Pick-off point Indicates if the Aux Buss is taking Aux 7 Aux 7/8 a Pre Fdr/ Post Fdr / Pre Dyn / Pre All signal.
Touch to navigate to the associated Aux output
controls to change the setting.
Aux 9
Aux 9
10. Aux link indicator Indicates the Aux channels
Aux 10
Aux 10
are linked. You can link Aux channels from an Input Aux 11
channel Aux Sends screen by touching one of the
Aux 11
Aux Master buttons, or one of the pick-off buttons.
Aux 12
Aux 12
Both take you to the Aux channel Setup screen
Aux 13
where linking is accomplished.
Aux 13
Aux 14
11. Aux sends pan slider Pans the signal between a Aux 14
linked pair of auxes.
Touch Recording
Mode
Recording Mode
OR
Recording Mode
Overview
EQ
Aux Sends
45
1
Joe's Aux
2
Aux 2
3
Aux 3
4
Aux 4
5
Aux 5
6
Aux 6
7
10
8
Aux 7 Aux 8
9
Aux 9
10
Aux 10
11
Aux 11
12
Aux 12
13
Aux 13
14
Aux 14
Press Rec/ Play
Touch Recording
Mode
OR
Touch Stereo MP3
Touch Auxes
Touch
Touch
Multitrack OR Multitrack
USB Drive
DAW
Touch Stereo In / 2Trk
Touch 2-Trk PB
Touch Auxes
Stereo MP3
USB Drive Playback
Auxes
OR Multitrack USB Drive
OR
Multitrack
DAW
Stereo In/2-Trk
2-Trk PB
Auxes
Audio Player
6-40
-40 -40
-20
-10
-20
-10
-20
-10
-40
-20
-10
-40
-20
-10
-40
-20
-10
-40
-20
-10
11 C
-40
-20
-10
-40
-20
-10
-40
-20
-10
-40
-20
-10
-40
-20
-10
-40
-20
-10
1
Auxes
Presets
Setup
2
Aux Overview
3
Reset
Prev
Next
Scene: Default
2-Trk PB
Main
U
7 8 9 10
-3.0
Mute
Pre Fdr
U
10
-28.0
Mute
Post Fdr
Cue
Cue
U
10
-3.0
Mute
Pre Dyn
Playback
Main
U
10
-12.0
Mute
PB Pre All
L/R
U
10
-inf
Mute
Pre Fdr
10
10
U
10
-inf
Mute
Pre Fdr
U
10
-inf
Mute
Pre Fdr
5
5
L
u
u
F
5 5
10 10
U
10
-inf
Mute
Pre Fdr
0
20
0
20
U
10
-inf
Mute
Pre Fdr
U
10
-inf
Mute
Pre Fdr
LR
40
40
U
10
-inf
Mute
Pre Fdr
U
10
-inf
Mute
Pre Fdr
U
10
-inf
Mute
Pre Fdr
Mute
Mute
1001108-01-E
71
2-Trk Playback - Presets
Recall presets for the MP3 Stereo and the 2-Trk Playback.
1. Presets tab Selects the Presets screen.
2. Current Preset Displays the name of the currently active preset (if any).
Press Rec/Play
3. Save / Save As button Displays a page with
options for naming a scene and selecting internal
Rec/ Play
or USB storage destination.
Touch Recording
Mode
Recording Mode
4. Factory list Displays a list of the factory programmed presets available for the currently loaded FX device. Touch a preset name to select.
Rec/
Recording
Play
Mode
5. Mixer (internal) list Displays a list of presets that have been stored to mixer's internal memory.
Main Mix L/R
Overview
EQ
6. USB (external) list Displays a list of presets that have been saved on an external (USB) drive.
7. Delete button Deletes a selected preset from the mixer or USB user memory.
8. Copy to USB button Copies the selected preset to an external USB Drive.
9. Copy to Mixer button Copies the selected preset to the internal mixer memory.
Joe's Monitor
Aux 1
Aux 2
Aux 2
Aux 3
Aux 3
Aux 4
Aux 4
Aux 5
Aux 5
Aux 6
Aux 6
2 4
10. Recall button Recalls the playback parameters Aux 7
Aux 7
of the selected preset. Recall affects Aux Sends,
Aux 8
EQ, Mutes, and Group assignments.
Aux 8
Aux 9
11. Omit Levels When on, the Aux and 2-Trk PB
Aux 9
fader levels are not affected by the preset Recall.
Aux 10
Aux 10
EQ levels are affected by the Recall in either
Aux 11
position.
Aux 11
Aux 12
Aux 12
Aux 13
Aux 13
Aux 14
Aux 14
Press Rec/ Play
Touch Recording
Mode
OR
Touch Stereo MP3
Touch
Touch
Multitrack OR Multitrack
USB Drive
DAW
Touch Stereo In / 2Trk
Touch 2-Trk PB
Stereo MP3
USB Drive Playback
Presets
Touch Presets
Touch Presets
Multitrack
USB Drive
OR
Multitrack
DAW
Stereo In/2-Trk
2-Trk PB
Presets
E ect
1
Auxes
Presets
3
Setup
Prev
Next
Scene: Default
2-Trk PB
Main
5
6
78 10
9 11
Cue
Cue
L
C
R
Playback
PB
Main
L/R
10
10
5
5
L
L
u AF
u
G
5
5
48
10
10
0
20
0
20
7
40
40
Mute
Mute
1001108-01-E
72
2-Trk Playback - Setup
Rename the 2-Trk PB channel, set Channel Safe, and assign the channel to Mute and DCA Groups
1. Setup tab Selects the Setup screen. 2. Name field Touch the Name to display a keyboard Press
that may be used to enter a name for the channel. Rec/Play
Touch Recording
Mode
3. Reset button Returns settings to the factory default.
Rec/
Recording
Play
Mode
4. Channel Safe During Scene Recall Setting this switch to Safe prevents channel settings from being changed when a Scene is recalled.
5. Main L/R button Turns the FX channel's assignment to the Main Left / Right output on and off.
Rec/
Recording
Play
Mode
Main Mix L/R
Overview
EQ
6. DCA Nroup Assignment Buttons Select the DCA Groups this channel is to be part of. See the DCA Groups topic.
Joe's Monitor
2
Aux 1
Aux 2
Aux 2
7. Mute Nroup Assignment Buttons Select the
Aux 3
Aux 3
Mute Groups this channel is to be part of. See the
Aux 4
Mute Groups topic.
Aux 4
Aux 5
Aux 5
Aux 6
Aux 6
Aux 7
Aux 7
Aux 8
Aux 8
Aux 9
Aux 9
Aux 10
Aux 10
Aux 11
Aux 11
6
Aux 12
Aux 12
Aux 13
Aux 13
7
Aux 14
Aux 14
Press Rec/ Play
Touch Recording
Mode
OR
Touch Stereo MP3
Touch Setup
Touch
Touch
Multitrack OR Multitrack
USB Drive
DAW
Touch Stereo In / 2Trk
Touch 2-Trk PB
Touch Setup
Stereo MP3
USB Drive Playback
Setup
Multitrack
USB Drive
OR
Multitrack
DAW
Stereo In/2-Trk
2-Trk PB
Setup
E ect
Auxes
1
Presets
Setup
3
Prev
Next
Scene: Default
2-Trk PB
Main
4 Channel Safe
During Scene Recall
Recallable
Safe
5
Cue
Cue
L
C
R
Playback
PB
Main
L/R
10
10
5
5
L
L
u AF
u
G
5
5
48
10
10
0
20
0
20
40
40
Mute
Mute
1001108-01-E
73
2-Trk / Multitrack Playback
Press
Multitrack mode plays back audio recorded on the
Home
USB drive. Multitrack DAW mode (TouchMix-30 Pro
only) plays back tracks from a Core Audio compliant
computer.
Touch Stereo In /
2-Trk
Stereo In/2-Trk
Inputs 1-8
Rec/ Play
Press Rec/Play
Recording Mode
Touch Recording
Mode
Multitrack
USB Drive
OR
Touch Multitrack USB Drive
Multitrack
DAW
Touch OR Multitrack
DAW
2-Track Playback plays files that have been recordedfrom the 2-Trk Record channel. If recording isstopped and resumed, a new .wav file is createdThe files in a session / directory are concatenated forseamless playback.
1. Stereo In/2-Trk bank touch to display 2-Trk PB channel and controls.
2. 2-Trk PB select button Touch to access details of the channel.
3. USB Session Displays title of active session. 4. Start of session button Touch to move to the
beginning of the session. 5. Rewind button Touch to move quickly through the
file towards the beginning of the session. 6. Play button Touch to begin playback of the
currently selected USB Session. Playback starts at the location of the Progress marker (16). 7. Fast Forward button Touch to move quickly through the file towards the end of the session. 8. Stop button Touch to stop playback of the current session. 9. Record button Touch to begin recording in the current session. Records all armed channels. 10. Playback Time Display Indicates elapsed time since beginning playback. 11. Recording Mode Touch to change from the MP3 Playback mode to either Multitrack USB Drive or Multitrack DAW (DAW available on TouchMix-30 Pro only). 12. Set button Touch to set the current spot, in the session, of the Loc (location) marker. 13. Go To button Touch to move the Progress Marker to the spot indicated by the Loc marker. 14. 00:00:00 Represents the start of the file. 15. Loc marker Touch and drag the Loc (location) marker to a spot in the file you want, then touch the Set button to set the location. 16. Progress marker Indicates the current playback position in the current session. Touch and drag to a spot in the file you want. 17. HH:MM:SS Indicates the length of the session. 18. Recording Setup displays the controls for 2-Trk Recording. Refer to the topic.FX Masters
1001108-01-E
74
FX Masters
FX Master - Overview
Provides a single-screen view of frequently used controls and indicators for the FX channel.
1. Overview tab Selects the Channel Overview screen.
2. Preset Shows the currently selected Preset for this channel. Touch the + to change.
3. Effect Shows the currently selected Effect type for this channel. Touch the + to change.
4. Pre Fader / Post Fader button Selects the Aux mix pick-off point for the effect. Selections are: Pre Fader before the FX master fader, or Post Fader after the FX master fader.
5. Reset button Sets all controls for the FX channel to the factory default position.
6. Assigned To Indicates the output assignments channel (L/R Main, Sub Groups 1 - 8).
7. DCA Indicates the DCA groups to which this channel is assigned.
Main Mix L/R
FX Masters
Inputs 1-8
1
Overview
Home
FX 1
Overview
EQ
E ect
Touch the FX Masters
Bank
Auxes
Joe's Monitor
Aux 1
Aux 2
Aux 2
Aux 3
Aux 3
Aux 4
Aux 4
Aux 5
Aux 5
Aux 6
Aux 6
Aux 7
Aux 7
Aux 8
Aux 8
Aux 9
Aux 9
Aux 10
2 9
13 15
3 6
1 12
7 10
2
14 16
4 17
Touch an FX Channel
Touch the Overview
Tab
Presets
Setup
5
Prev
Next
Scene: Default
FX 1
Main
8 11
Cue
Cue
18
L
C
R
FX
Main
1
L/R
10
10
5
5
L
L
u F
u
G
5
5
48
10
10
0
20
0
20
8. Mute Indicates the Mute groups to which this
Aux 10
Aux 11
channel is assigned.
Aux 11
9. Parametric EQ graph A graphic representation
Aux 12
Aux 12
of the equalization curve based on the EQ settings.
Aux 13
The trace dims to indicate that the EQ is
Aux 13
Aux 14
Out (disengaged).
Aux 14
40
40
Mute
Mute
· EQ Nraph vertical scale Represents audio level from -20 dB to +20 dB.
· EQ Nraph horizontal scale Represents frequency from 20 Hz to 20 kHz.
10. EQ Out/In Engages / disengages the equalizer for the FX channel.
11. Aux Sends
· Displays the system numbers and user-defined names for the Aux channels.
· Adjustable sliders send signal to the associated Aux channel output.
· Mute indicates if the channel's send to an Aux is muted or not.
12. EQ Handles Touch, hold, and drag to change the Frequency and Gain of the associated EQ band. The frequency band button must be engaged to see the EQ Handles.
13. Low Cut Filter and Shelf filters 1 and 2 These buttons engage or disengage the associated filter.
NOTE!: To adjust the following parameters, select the field then use the Master encoder or the up/down nudge buttons on a mobile device.
14. Nain, shelf filters 1 and 2 Displays and adjusts gain (+/- 15 dB) of the frequency band. 15. Low-Cut filter frequency Displays and adjusts the knee frequency for the high and low cut filters. 16. Shelf filters 1and 2 frequency adjustment fields Displays and adjusts the center frequency for both parametric EQ bands. 17. Aux number & name Displays the system numbers and user-defined names for the Aux mixes. 18. M Indicates if the FX channel send to the Aux mix is muted. You can change this in the FX Masters Auxes tab.
1001108-01-E
75
FX Masters - EQ
Controls and displays the settings for the FX Master channel equalization.
1. EQ Tab Selects the FX Master EQ screen. 2. EQ In/Out Engages / bypasses the equalizer. 3. RTA On Enables the Real Time Analyzer. 4. Reset Sets the equalizer to factory default (flat). 5. RTA 1/3 octave Real Time Analyzer display of the
post-EQ signal.
Home
Main Mix L/R
FX Masters
Inputs 1-8
1
Overview
Joe's Ears
2
Aux 1
Aux 2
Aux 2
5
Aux 3
Aux 3
FX 1
EQ
E ect
Aux 4
NOTE!: A maximum of two RTA displays
Aux 4
are available at a time on any combination
Aux 5
Aux 5
of a mixer and tablet devices.
Aux 6
NOTE!: When the RTA is off, the
Aux 6
6
Aux 7
Aux 7/8
17
Parametric EQ graph expands to use the
entire graph area.
Aux 9
Aux 9
Aux 10
6. EQ Nraph A graphic representation of the
Aux 10
8
EQ settings. The vertical measurement is gain, the
Aux 11
Aux 11
horizontal is frequency.
Aux 12
Aux 12
7. EQ Handles Touch, hold, and drag to change the
Aux 13
11
Frequency and Gain of the associated EQ band. The
Aux 13
frequency band button must be engaged to see the
Aux 14
Aux 14
EQ Handles.
8. Low Cut Adjusts the low cut (high pass) filter frequency.
9. Shelf Filter Buttons Engages / bypasses the individual shelf filters.
10. Nain Adjusts the gain of the associated shelf filter over a range of -15 dB to +15 dB.
11. Freq Sets the frequency of the associated shelf filter.
EQ
10 11
Touch FX Masters
Auxes
9
Touch an FX
Channel
Touch the EQ Tab
Presets
3
Setup
4
Prev
Next
Scene: Default
FX 1
Main
Cue
Cue
2
10 11
FX
Main
1
L/R
10
10
5
5
L
L
u
u
AF
G
5
5
48
10
10
0
20
0
20
40
40
Mute
Mute
1001108-01-E
76
FX Masters - Presets
Recall presets for the selected FX channel based on the current FX device.
1. Presets tab Selects the Presets screen. 2. Current Preset Displays the name of the
currently active preset (if any).
3. Save / Save As button Displays a page with options for naming a scene and selecting internal or USB storage destination.
4. Factory list Displays a list of the factory programmed presets available for the currently loaded FX device. Touch a preset name to select.
5. Mixer (internal) list Displays a list of presets that have been stored to Internal mixer memory.
6. USB (external) list Displays a list of presets that have been saved on an External (USB) drive.
7. Delete button Deletes a selected preset from Internal or External user memory.
8. Copy to USB button Copies the selected preset to an external USB Drive.
9. Copy to Mixer button Copies the selected preset to the internal mixer memory.
10. Recall button Recalls the effects parameters of a preset selected in the Factory, Mixer or USB list. Recall does not affect Aux Sends, EQ, Mutes, or Group assignments.
FX Masters
Inputs 1-8
Press Home
FX 1
Presets
Touch FX Masters
Select an FX Channel
Touch Presets
1001108-01-E
77
FX Master - Setup
Rename the FX Master channel, and assign the channel to Mute and DCA Groups
1. Setup tab Selects the Setup screen. 2. Name field Touch to display a keyboard and enter
a name for the channel.
3. Reset button Returns settings to the factory default.
4. Effect Pick-Off Selects a pre or post-fader pickoff point for the effect send.
5. Main L/R button Turns the FX channel's assignment to the Main Left / Right output on and off.
6. DCA Nroup Assignment Buttons Select the DCA Groups this channel is to be part of. See the DCA Groups topic.
7. Mute Nroup Assignment Buttons Select the Mute Groups this channel is to be part of. See the Mute Groups topic.
FX Masters
Inputs 1-8
Press
Touch FX
Menu
Masters
FX 1
Setup
2 4
Touch an FX
Channel
1 3
Touch Setup
5
6 7
1001108-01-E
78
FX Master - Auxes
These sends allow the effect to be returned to mixes for stage monitors, in ear monitors, remote speakers or video / broadcast.
FX Masters
Inputs 1-8
Home
FX 1
Auxes
Touch the FX Masters
Bank
Touch an FX Channel
Touch Auxes Tab
1. Auxes tab Selects the Aux Sends screen
2. Aux Overview button Navigates to the Aux Overview which displays all Aux mixes on a single screen.
3. Reset button Resets all Aux Sends controls, for the selected input channel, to the factory default.
4. Aux send system number Displays the number of the associated Aux Output.
5. Aux Mix name Displays the Aux mix name. Touch to navigate to the associated Aux output controls.
6. Aux send sliders Set the level of audio sent from the channel to the Aux output; -40 dB (-Inf) is off. Sliders are color coded.
7. Nain readout Provides a numeric display of the Aux send level.
8. Mute button Mutes the send from the channel to the associated Aux mix. Does not effect any other mixes.
9. Pick-off point button Indicates if the Aux Buss is taking a Pre Fdr/ Post Fdr / Pre Dyn / Pre All signal. Touch to navigate to the associated Aux output setup screen to change the setting.
Main Mix L/R
Overview
EQ
Joe's Ears
Aux 1
Aux Sends
Aux 2
Aux 2
Aux 3
Aux 3
Aux 4
Aux 4
4 1
5 Joe's Aux
2
Aux 2
3
Aux 3
Aux 5 4
Aux 5/6
Aux 4
Aux 7
Aux 7
Aux 8
Aux 8
Aux 9
Aux 9
Aux 10
Aux 10
Aux 11
Aux 11
Aux 12
Aux 12
Aux 13
Aux 13
Aux 14
Aux 14
5
10
Aux 5 Aux 6
Aux 7
Aux 8
9
Aux 9
10
Aux 10
11
Aux 11
12
Aux 12
13
Aux 13
14
Aux 14
Effect
6
11
1
Auxes
Presets
Setup
2
Aux Overview
3
Reset
Prev
Next
Scene: Default
FX 1
Main
789
-3.0
Mute
Pre Fdr
-28.0
Mute
Post Fdr
-3.0
Mute
Pre Dyn
-12.0
Mute
Pre All
Cue
Cue
L
C
R
Mic
Main
1
L/R
-inf
Mute
Pre Fdr
-inf
Mute
Pre Fdr
-inf
Mute
Pre Fdr
10
10
5
5
L
u
u
AF
5
5
10 10
-inf
Mute
Pre Fdr
-inf
Mute
Pre Fdr
-inf
Mute
Pre Fdr
-inf
Mute
Pre Fdr
-inf
Mute
Pre Fdr
-inf
Mute
Pre Fdr
0
20
0
20
LR
40
40
Mute
Mute
10. Aux link indicator Indicates the Aux channels are linked. You can link Aux channels from an Input channel Aux Sends screen by touching one of the Aux Master buttons, or one of the pick-off buttons. Both take you to the Aux channel Setup screen where linking is accomplished.
11. Aux sends pan-slider Pans the signal between a linked pair of auxes.
1001108-01-E
79
FX Overview
Provides an overview of the channel FX Send and Return levels. FX sends and FX Master levels may be adjusted by touching (selecting) the control then using the Master Encoder or the Nudge buttons on a tablet device.
FX Overview Screen
NOTE!: Only Input and Sub Nroup banks are selectable on the Nav Strip.
1. Select an Input or Sub Group bank. 2. Each column (In 1, In 2 ...) represents a channel,
and lists the channel's six FX Sends. 3. Each row represents an FX mix, and lists the FX
Sends for the mix. 4. FX Master fader Adjusts the overall level of the
effect that will be heard in the mix. 5. FX Processor Icon Indicates the currently
selected FX device for the FX mix.
Menu
FX Overview
1 2
3
Press Menu
Touch FX Overview
4 5
1001108-01-E
80
Wizards
FX Wizard
The FX Wizard aids in selecting and routing effects. 1. FX1 - 6 tabs Selects one of six FX processors.
(Four on TouchMix-8 and TouchMix-16)
Wizard
FX Wizard
Press Wizard
Touch FX Wizard
NOTE!: The Source, Type, and FX Preset windows provide a means of selecting an Effect based on what the source is. If any of the lists fill the window, flick up on the list to show more selections.
2. Source list Use the Source window to select the source instrument category.
3. Type list Use the Type windows to select the specific type of instrument. This narrows the selection to a list of recommended presets appropriate for the application.
4. FX Preset list Use the FX Preset window to select the Effect and variation. For example, in the FX Preset window the letter "D" refers to the Dense Reverb Effect, and the text following the letter indicates the Preset (variation) of the Dense Reverb.
5. Recall button Loads selected effect.
6. Clear button Unassigns all the inputs and outputs.
7. Select inputs to feed
Label
Each input channel is represented by a button.
Touch one or more of these buttons to apply the effect to an input.
8. Cue button Touch Cue above the FX fader to hear the output of the selected effect on the Cue system.
9. Select Aux Output buttons Each Aux Output is represented by a button. Touch one or more of these buttons to send the effect to the associated Aux Output.
1001108-01-E
81
Nain izard
The Gain Wizard monitors input clipping and provides an indication of how much input gain reduction is needed.
NOTE!: The Gain Wizard provides an indication of the frequency and intensity of clipping to aid in proper adjustment of input sensitivity.
1. Reset Button Use this to clear the Gain Wizard after adjusting the input sensitivity.
2. Tick-Mark Counters Indicates how many tick marks to turn the Trim knob counterclockwise to prevent clipping.
3. Trim Knob Turn this knob (on the TouchMix surface) the number of tick marks indicated on the Tick-Mark counter.
Wizard
Gain Wizard
Press Wizard
Touch Gain Wizard
1001108-01-E
82
Room Tuning izard
The Room Tuning Wizard assists in adjusting output equalization
1. Tuning Output Displays the system and friendly name of the output being tuned.
2. Restart Go back and start over. 3. Clear Tuning EQ Resets the GEQ, for the
currently selected output to the factory default. 4. Select Output buttons Touch the output to
be tuned. 5. Select Measurement Method Each method
progressively adds more measurement spots to increase the accuracy of the settings. The Skip Measurement, Use Previous method allows measurement data from the last tuning to be used. 6. Next moves the Wizard to the next step. Follow the instructions on the subsequent screens. (see below) When finished, touch the "Navigate to GEQ" button. The settings display on the output GEQ screen. An outline of the fader knob indicates the tuning wizard settings.
The following illustrations show the procedure.
Home
Touch an Output
Touch GEQ
Aux 1
OR
Main
GEQ
Wizard
Tuning Wizard
1
4
5
Touch Tuning Wizard
OR
Press Wizard
Tuning Wizard
2
3
Touch Tuning Wizard
6
1001108-01-E
83
-- Step 1 --
-- Step 3 -- -- Step 4 --
-- Step 2 --
-- Step 5 --
1001108-01-E
84
FX Processor
FX Processor Basic Chorus
Home The Chorus FX Varies the pitch of a signal at a steady
rate to "thicken" a sound.
Touch the FX Masters
Bank
Touch an FX Channel
Touch the Effect Tab
Touch Effect Pull-
Down
Touch Chorus
You can access the Effects from the Inputs and Sub Group banks.
1. Effect Touch to select an Effect Type. 2. Preset Name of the current preset. Touch to
access the library of Presets.
3. Simple button Turns Simple mode on and off. Hides all but the essential controls on the selected FX. Not present on Mono and Stereo Delay effects.
4. Reset button Returns processor and Aux Send controls to their default settings.
5. Input meter Displays the incoming audio level before the Effect.
6. Output meter Display the audio level after the Effect.
7. LFO Rate knob Determines the rate at which the pitch will be varied.
8. LFO Depth knob Controls the amount of modulation applied to the audio signal.
9. LFO Type switch Selects how the pitch will be varied.
10. Lo Cut knob Attenuates, or "cuts" frequencies below this frequency setting. Range is 20 Hz to 2 kHz.
Main Mix L/R
FX Masters
Inputs 1-8
FX 1
Overview
EQ
E ect
E ect
1 Joe's Monitor
Aux 1
Aux 2
Aux 2
Aux 3
Aux 3
Aux 4
Aux 4
Aux 5
Aux 5
Aux 6
Aux 6
Aux 7
7
Aux 7
Aux 8
Aux 8
Aux 9
Aux 9
Aux 10
Aux 10
Aux 11
Aux 11
Aux 12
Aux 12
Aux 13
Aux 13
Aux 14
Aux 14
2 5
8
9
12 a
M
b
c d
E ect
None
+
Chorus
Auxes
Presets
Setup
3
4
Prev
Next
Scene: Default
FX 1
Main
6
Cue
Cue
L
C
R
10
11
FX
Main
1
L/R
10
10
5
5
L
L
u
u
AF
G
5
5
48
10
10
0
20
0
20
40
40
Mute
Mute
11. Hi Cut knob Attenuates, or "cuts" frequencies above this frequency setting. Range is 200 Hz to 20 kHz.
Type
Sine
Saw
12. FX Returns to Monitors a. M Indicates the Aux Send for the Effect is muted from the Auxes tab. b. Send Slider Sets the level of the Effect to the Aux output, typically the performer's monitor. c. Link icon Indicates the Auxes are linked. d. Aux Pan control Pans between the two linked Auxes.
Rate .35 Hz
5.0 Hz
Slower
Depth .1
Less Depth
3.5
Faster More Depth
1001108-01-E
85
FX Processor Dense Reverb
The Dense Reverb (presets with a "D" suffix) is a model of a DSP reverb with more dense reflections that some may find more representative of actual acoustic spaces.
Input channels and Sub Groups are able to send to the effect.
1. Effect Touch to select an Effect Type. 2. Preset Name of the current preset. Touch to
access the preset library. 3. Simple button Turns Simple mode on and off.
Hides all but the essential controls on the selected effect. 4. Reset button Returns processor and Aux Send controls to their default settings. 5. Input meter Displays the incoming audio level. 6. Output meter Displays the post-effectaudio level. 7. Reverb Time Reverb Time (RT) is the length of time required for the reverberation to drop by 60 dB. 8. Initial Delay knob Sets the time interval between input signal and first reflection. 9. High Ratio knob Changes the amount of high frequency reflections. 10. Diffusion knob Controls the density of groups of Early Reflections. Or Simulates the complexity of surfaces off which the sound reflects.
Home
Touch the FX Masters
Bank
Touch an FX Channel
Main Mix L/R
FX Masters
Inputs 1-8
FX 1
Overview
EQ
E ect
E ect
1 Joe's Monitor
Aux 1
Aux 2
Aux 2
Aux 3
Aux 3
Aux 4
Aux 4
Aux 5
Aux 5
Aux 6
Aux 6
Aux 7
Aux 7
Aux 8
Aux 8
Aux 9
Aux 9
Aux 10
Aux 10
Aux 11
Aux 11
Aux 12
Aux 12
Aux 13
Aux 13
Aux 14
Aux 14
2 + 5
7
8
9
13
15 a
M
b
c d
Touch the Effect Tab
Touch Effect Pull-Down
Touch Dense Reverb
E ect
None
+
Dense Reverb
Auxes
Presets
Setup
Prev
Next
Scene: Default
+
3
4
FX 1
Main
6
Cue
Cue
L
C
R
FX
Main
1
L/R
10
10
10
11
12
5
5
L
14
L
u F
u
G
5
5
48
10
10
0
20
0
20
40
40
Mute
Mute
11. Reverb Delay knob Changes the delay between reflections.
12. Early Reflect knob Changes the amplitude of the early reflections.
13. Lo Cut knob Attenuates, or "cuts" frequencies below this frequency setting. Range is to 20 Hz to 2 kHz.
14. Hi Cut knob Attenuates, or "cuts" frequencies above this frequency setting. Range is 200 Hz to 20 kHz.
15. FX Returns to Monitors Sliders adjust the level of the effect heard in the performers' monitors.
a. M Indicates the Aux Send for the Effect is muted from the Auxes tab.
b. Send slider Sets the level of the Effect to the Aux output.
c. Link icon Indicates the Auxes are linked.
d. Aux Pan control Pans between the two linked Auxes.
1001108-01-E
86
FX Processor Lush Reverb
Reverb presets with an "L" suffix use a DSP reverb model with a more "lush" character.
Home
Touch the FX Masters
Bank
Touch an FX Channel
Touch the Effect Tab
Touch Effect Pull-Down
Touch Lush Reverb
1. Effect Name of the current Effect. Touch to select an Effect Type.
FX Masters
Inputs 1-8
FX 1
E ect
E ect
None
+
Lush Reverb
2. Preset Name of the current preset. Touch to access the library of Presets.
Main Mix L/R
Overview
EQ
E ect
Auxes
Presets
Setup
Prev
Next
Scene: Default
3. Simple button Turns Simple mode on and off. Hides all but the essential controls on the selected FX. Not present on Mono and Stereo Delay effects .
4. Reset button Returns processor and Aux Send controls to default settings.
5. Input meter Displays the level of incoming, mono audio signal.
6. Output meter Displays the stereo level of the processed output signal.
7. Low Cut Attenuates, or "cuts" frequencies below the set frequency. Range is 20 Hz to 2 kHz.
8. Hi Cut Attenuates, or "cuts" frequencies above the set frequency. Range is 200 Hz to 20 kHz.
9. Size Adjusts dimension of the simulated acoustic space in meters.
10. Pre Delay Sets the time interval between input signal and first reflection
11. Low Reverb Adjusts the reverb decay time for frequencies below the crossover frequency.
1 Joe's Monitor
Aux 1
Aux 2
Aux 2
5
Aux 3
Aux 3
Aux 4
Aux 4
Aux 5
Aux 5
Aux 6
Aux 6
9
Aux 7
Aux 7
Aux 8
Aux 8
Aux 9
Aux 9
Aux 10
Aux 10
Aux 11
Aux 11
Aux 12
Aux 12
Aux 13
Aux 13
Aux 14
Aux 14
2 +
10
11
15 a
M
b
c d
+ 7
3
4
6
8
12
13
14
FX 1
Main
Cue
Cue
L
C
R
FX
Main
1
L/R
10
10
5
5
L
u
u
F
5 5
48
10
10
0
20
0
20
LR
40
40
Mute
Mute
12. Crossover Sets the crossover point for the Low Reverb Time and the High Reverb Time.
13. High Reverb Adjusts the reverb decay time for frequencies above the crossover frequency.
14. Diffusion Adjusts the early reflections to simulate a more or less complex reflective acoustic surface.
15. FX Returns to Monitors:
a. M Indicates the Aux Send for the Effect is muted from the Auxes tab.
b. Send Slider Sets the level of the Effect to the Aux output.
c. Link icon Indicates the Auxes are linked.
d. Aux Pan control Pans between the two linked Auxes.
1001108-01-E
87
FX Processor Mono and Stereo Delay
Home These effects delay the audio signal to create echo and similar effects. Controls for the stereo delay may be
Touch the FX Masters
Bank
Touch an FX Channel
linked or operated independently. Input channels and Sub Groups are able to send to
FX Masters
Inputs 1-8
FX 1
E ect
the effect.
Main Mix
1. Effect Touch to select a different Effect Type.
L/R
Overview
EQ
E ect
2. Preset Displays the name of the current preset.
1 Joe's Monitor
2
Aux 1
Touch to access the preset library.
Aux 2
3.
Aux 2
5
Aux 3
4. Reset Returns processor and Aux Send controls
Aux 3
to their default settings.
Aux 4
7
Aux 4
5. Input Displays the incoming audio level before
Aux 5
Aux 5
the Effect.
Aux 6
6. Output Displays the post-effect audio level.
Aux 6
Aux 7
7. Link Button (Stereo Delay only) Links all
Aux 7
controls of both channels. Channel two is set to the
Aux 8
Aux 8
same level as Channel one.
Aux 9
8
9 Tap
Tempo
10 11
Touch the Effect Tab
Touch Effect Pull-Down
Touch Stereo or Mono Delay
E ect
None
+
Stereo or Mono Delay
Auxes
Presets
Setup
3
4
Prev
Next
Scene: Default
In 1
Main
6
Cue
Cue
L
C
R
8
9 Tap
10
Tempo
12
Mic
Main
1
L/R
10
10
5
5
L
L
u F
u
G
5
5
48
10
10
8. Delay Knob Sets the delay time in milliseconds.
Aux 9
Aux 10
9. Tap Tempo Button Sets the tempo of the
Aux 10
regenerations by tapping. Touch the Tap Tempo
Aux 11
Aux 11
button, then tap the Master Control knob at a
Aux 12
steady rate.
Aux 12
Aux 13
10. Regen Knob Adjusts the amount of delayed
Aux 13
signal that is sent back to the input. At 0% only the
Aux 14
Aux 14
first echo will be heard. At 99% the echo will repeat
indefinitely at the same level.
13 a
b
c d
0
20
0
20
LR
40
40
12
34
56
78
Mute
Mute
11. Lo Cut Knob Attenuates, or "cuts" frequencies below this frequency setting. Range is 20 Hz to 2 kHz.
12. Hi Cut Knob Attenuates, or "cuts" frequencies above this frequency setting. Range is 200 Hz to 20 kHz.
13. FX Returns to Monitors Sliders adjust the level of the effect heard in the performers' monitors.
a. M Indicates the Aux Send for the Effect is muted from the Auxes tab.
b. Send Slider Sets the level of the Effect to the Aux output.
c. Link icon Indicates the Auxes are linked.
d. Aux Pan control Pans between the two linked Auxes.
1001108-01-E
88
FX Processor Pitch Shift
Home The Pitch Shift raises or lowers the pitch of an audio signal by a fixed interval. In addition, the signal can be delayed from the original. The two output channels can be adjusted independently.
Touch the FX Masters
Bank
Touch an FX Channel
Touch the Effect Tab
Touch Effect Pull-Down
Touch Pitch Shift
FX Masters
Inputs 1-8
FX 1
E ect
E ect
None
+
Pitch Shift
1. Effect Touch to select an Effect Type. 2. Preset Name of the current preset. Touch to
access the library of Presets.
3. Simple button Turns Simple mode on and off. Hides all but the essential controls on the selected FX. Not present on Mono and Stereo Delay effects.
4. Reset button Returns processor and Aux Send controls to their default settings.
5. Input meter Displays the incoming audio level before the Effect.
6. Output meter Display the audio level after the Effect. 7. Left and Right Shift knobs Set the amount of
shift, down (-) or up (+) for the two output channels.
· 100¢ = 1 half step,
· 200 ¢ = 1 whole step,
· 1200¢ = 1 octave
8. Lo Cut knob Attenuates, or "cuts" audio below the set frequency. Range is 20 Hz to 2 kHz.
9. Hi Cut knob Attenuates, or "cuts" audio above the set frequency. Range is 200 Hz to 20 kHz.
Main Mix L/R
Overview
EQ
Effect
Joe's Ears
1
Aux 1
Aux 2
Aux 2
Aux 3
Aux 3
Aux 4
Aux 4
Aux 5
Aux 5
Aux 6
Aux 6
Aux 7
Aux 7/8
2 5
7
7
8
Aux 9
Aux 9
Aux 10
Aux 10
Aux 11
Aux 11
Aux 12
Aux 12
Aux 13
Aux 13
Aux 14
Aux 14
11 a
b
c d
Auxes
Presets
Setup
3
4
Prev
Next
Scene: Default
FX 1
Main
6
Cue
Cue
L
C
R
FX
Main
1
L/R
10
10
10
10
5
5
L
9
L
u F
u
G
5
5
48
10
10
0
20
0
20
LR
40
40
12
34
56
78
Mute
Mute
10. Rotating the Master Encoder will change the amount of pitch shift in half-step intervals. For finer adjustments, hold the Encoder down while adjusting.
11. Left and Right Delay knobs Adds up to 100 milliseconds of delay to the Pitch Shift output.
12. FX Returns to Monitors:
a. M Indicates the Aux Send for the Effect is muted from the Auxes tab.
b. Send slider Sets the level of the Effect to the Aux output, typically the performer's monitor.
c. Link icon Indicates the Auxes are linked.
d. Aux Pan control Pans between the two linked Auxes.
1001108-01-E
89
FX Processor Pitch Correct
Corrects intonation of the audio signal.
IMPORTANT!: Pitch-Correct may be enabled/disabled by User Buttons without regards to the position of the Enable button on this screen. If you don't hear any difference with Pitch Correct enabled, check to make sure the feature has not been disabled using the User Button feature. Refer to the User Button topic.
1. Pitch Correct Enable button Assigns Pitch Correct to the currently selected channel and enables/disables the effect.
2. Key knob Selects a key for the pitch corrector to use in determining the target note. If "None" is selected, the Pitch Corrector will target the nearest chromatic pitch. The table shows the Key selections.
3. Blend knob Sets the ratio of uncorrected (Dry) to corrected (Wet) signal. When fully clockwise, only corrected signal will be heard. When fully counter clockwise, only the original signal will be heard. Intermediate settings will result in a doubling effect.
4. Correct Rate knob determines how quickly the pitch is corrected.
Key Selection
None E
A
C C/D D D/E
F F/G G G/A
A/B B
Home
Touch an Input
Bank
Touch an In Channel
Touch the FX Tab
Input 1-8
In 1
FX
Inputs 1-8
Main Mix L/R
Overview
EQ
Comp
Gate
Scene:
FX
Auxes
Presets
Setup
Default
Prev Next
Joe's Monitor
Aux 1
Aux 2
Aux 2
Aux 3
Aux 3
Aux 4
Aux 4
Aux 5
Aux 5
Aux 6
Aux 6
Aux 7
Aux 7
Aux 8
Aux 8
Aux 9
Aux 9
Aux 10
Aux 10
Aux 11
Aux 11
Aux 12
Aux 12
Aux 13
Aux 13
Aux 14
Aux 14
FX Overview
Simple
Reset
In 1
Main
FX Buses
Global FX Parameters
Pre/Post Fader
Chorus
FX 1 Joe's FX
Cue
Cue
-40
-20
-10
U
10
Hz
Rate
-11.5
2.3
Depth
0.63
Pre
L
C
R
Dense Reverb FX 2 FX 2
-40
-20
-10
U
10
-23.0
Mic
Sec Rev Time
mSec Initial Delay
1
34.0
0.00
Post
Lush Reverb FX 3 FX 3
-40
-20
-10
U
10
-inf
m
Size
mSec Pre Delay
C
1.43
0.5
Pre
L
G
Mono Delay FX 4 FX 4
-40
-20
-10
U
10
48
mSec Delay
% Regen
-inf
1.7
0.5
Pre
Main
L/R
10
10
5
5
L
u
u
AF
5 5
10 10
None
FX 5 FX 5
-40
-20
-10
U
10
-inf
Param 1 32
0
20
0
20
Param 2
0.00
Pre
Basic Chorus FX 6 FX 6
-40
-20
-10
U
10
-inf
Hz
Rate
1.5
Depth
0.5
Pre
1
Pitch Correct
Enable
2
Key
3
4
E
Blend Amount
20%
Correct Rate
8.3
Dry
Wet
Slow
Fast
LR
40
40
12
34
56
78
Mute
Mute
1001108-01-E
90
Remote Connections
NOTE!: For remote devices only. Lists any TouchMix mixers found on the network to which your device is connected.
When multiple TouchMix mixers are connected to a single network, this page is used to select a single mixer to control with a tablet device.
1. List of mixers connected to the same network as your device. In the example there are three mixers.
2. The blue highlight indicates which mixer is selected. Touch the name of a mixer to change the selection.
3. Select button Touch this button to connect your device to the selected network.
4. Cancel button Touch this button to close the dialog without making any changes.
5. Example "5" shows a mixer (My TM-30) that created a network, and the remote device that is viewing the "Remote Connections" page, is connected to the created network.
Menu
Network
Found Mixers on Network:
1
Found Mixers
2 FOH TM-30
Garage TM-30 TM-30 - practice only
3
Select
4
Cancel
Press Menu
Touch Network
Found Mixers on Network: Found Mixers
None (o ine)
5 My TM-30
Select
Cancel
1001108-01-E
91
Security
Provides four levels of password-enabled security to TouchMix functionality.
Menu
Security
Login Screen
Main Mix L/R
Security Setup
1. Current Login The level of the person currently logged in. 2. Security Settings button Touch to access the Security
Settings where passwords can be set for all levels. 3. Logout / Lock button Touch to logout of the
Security Settings. 4. Enter Password Touch the white area to enter a
password. If passwords are not set, go directly to the Security Settings.
Security Setup
IMPORTANT!: Setting the password for Administrator enables the Security feature. Leave this field empty to operate the mixer without security restrictions. However, If the mixer is accessible to others, it may be a good idea to enter an administrator password to prevent mischievous or inadvertent password creation that would lock you out of your own mixer.
NOTE!: Forgotten Administrator Password? Contact QSC Technical Support.
Joe's Monitor
Aux 1
Aux 2
Aux 2
Aux 3
Aux 3
Aux 4
Aux 4
Aux 5
Aux 5
Aux 6
Aux 6
Aux 7
Aux 7
Aux 8
Aux 8
Aux 9
Aux 9
Aux 10
Aux 10
Aux 11
Aux 11
Aux 12
Aux 12
Aux 13
Aux 13
Aux 14
Aux 14
1
Current Login:
Security not enabled
4
Enter Password:
1. Current Login The level of the person currently logged in.
2. Close Security Settings button Touch to return to the
Security Setup page where can login again, or press Home to exit. Menu
Security
Security Settings
Press Menu
3. Logout / Lock button Touch to logout of the Security Settings, displays the Login button.
Main Mix L/R
Security Setup
4. Set Passwords Enter a password in one of the text boxes Joe's Monitor to protect the corresponding functions. Leave the field blank if Aux1
1
Current Login:
Security not enabled
you want to give anyone access to that level of functionality.
Aux 2
Aux 2
5. Administrator Setting a Password enables security.
Aux 3
5 Administrator
Logging in as Administrator gives access to all mixer functions Aux3
Aux 4
including Security Settings. Be certain to remember this Aux 4
Set Password:
4
password!
Aux 5
6. All Access Allows access to all mixer functions except
Aux 5
Aux 6
6 All Access
Security Setup.
Aux 6
Set Password:
4
7. Simple Mode Only Allows access to all simple-mode
Aux 7
Aux 7
mixer functions for screens having a Simple / Advance choice, Aux 8
and all other functions except Security Setup.
Aux 8
Aux 9
8. Levels Only Access to level controls only.
Aux 9
7 Simple Mode Only
Set Password:
4
9. Overwrite Scenes & Presets Allows or denies the Aux 10
Aux 10
ability to change a Scene or Preset in user memory.
Aux 11
8 Levels Only
10. Recall Scenes Allows or denies the ability to recall a scene Aux11 Aux 12
Set Password:
4
from memory.
Aux 12
11. Recall Presets Allows or denies the ability to recall a preset from memory.
12. Auto Lock On/Off Automatically logs out the current
Aux 13
Aux 13
Aux 14
Aux 14
12
Auto-lock O
On
Hours: 1
password after a preset period.
13. Hours and Minutes Sets the amount of time it takes for the Auto Lock to be activated.
Press Menu
Touch Security
2
Security Settings
3
Logout / Lock
Scene: Default
Main
Cue
Touch Security
Main
L/R
10
5 L
u AF
5
10
0
20
40
Mute
Touch Security Settings
2
3
Close Security Settings
Logout / Lock
Scene: Default
Main
Overwrite Scenes and Presets
Recall Scenes
Recall Presets
On
On
On
9
10
11
Overwrite Scenes and Presets
Recall Scenes
Recall Presets
O
On O
On O
On
Overwrite Scenes and Presets
Recall Scenes
Recall Presets
O
On O
On O
On
Overwrite Scenes and Presets
Recall Scenes
Recall Presets
O
On O
On
O
13
Minutes: 15
Cue
Main
L/R
10
5 L
u AF
5
10
0
20
40
Mute
1001108-01-E
92
Miscellaneous Features
Menu
The Menu provides links to various utility, setup and other functions.
Touch a button to access the functionality.
1. Scenes (Scenes on page 103) 2. DCA Groups (DCA Group Assignments on page 108) 3. Talkback (Talkback / Noise on page 110) 4. Patch Matrix (Patch Matrix (TouchMix-30 Pro
only) on page 120) 5. FX Overview (FX Overview on page 80) 6. Channel Safe (Channel Safe on page 104) 7. Auto Mixer (Auto Mixer TouchMix-30 Pro on
page 105) 8. External Faders ("External Control Surfaces -
TouchMix-30 Pro" on page 106) Clear functions
9. Clip Resets clip indications on the Nav Strip. The clip indications are cleared only on the device on which the clear Clip button was pressed. By default, User Button 2 (TouchMix-30 Pro only) also performs this function.
10. Mute Unmutes all Mutes except Mute Groups, and DCA Mutes.
11. Cue Clears the Cue. By default, User Button 3 also performs this function.
12. Copy/Paste Remove any copied information from the mixer's clipboard.
Setup functions
Press Menu
Menu
Main Mix L/R
Menu
Scene: Default
Joe's Monitor
Aux 1
Aux 2
Aux 2
Aux 3
Aux 3
Aux 4
Aux 4
Aux 5
Aux 5
Aux 6
Aux 6
Aux 7
Aux 7
Aux 8
Aux 8
Aux 9
Aux 9
Aux 10
Aux 10
Aux 11
Aux 11
Aux 12
Aux 12
Aux 13
Aux 13
Aux 14
Aux 14
1
Scenes
2
DCA Groups
5
FX Overview
6
Channel Safe
3
Talkback
(Noise)
7
Auto Mixer
4
Patch Matrix
8
External Faders
9
Clip
Clear
10
Mute
11
Cue
12
Copy/Paste
13
Mixer Setup
Setup
14
15
User Buttons
Custom Banks
16
MIDI
17
Network
18
19
Remote Control
Security
Screen Mode
20
21
Simple
Advanced
22
Language
23
Resume Demo
Main
Cue
Main
L/R
10
5 L
u AF
5
10
0
20
40
Mute
Tablet Buttons
13
Mixer Setup
Setup
14
User Buttons
15
Custom Banks
Screen Mode
20
Simple
21
Advanced
13. Mixer Setup (Mixer Setup on page 96) 14. User Buttons (User Buttons on page 95) 15. Custom Banks "Custom Fader Banks -
TouchMix-30 Pro" on page 107
17
Network
19
Security
22
Language
16. MIDI (MIDI on page 109) 17. Network
a. Mixer only: Setup Wireless and Wired networks on the Mixer. (TouchMix Wi-Fi Control on page 111) b. Tablets only: Select a mixer from a list of mixers on the network to which your tablet is connected . (Remote Connections on page 91) 18. Remote Control Settings Not available on remote devices. (Remote Control Settings on page 94) 19. Security (Security on page 92) Screen Mode functions
20. Simple displays a reduced set of controls on all screens having Advanced and Simple mode.. 21. Advanced displays and allows access to all controls on all screens having Advanced and Simple mode.
NOTE: Switching from Advanced to Simple will not change any control value settings.
22. Language Select , Deutsch, English, Français, Español. The languages changes for the Info screens and the Demo screens. Language selection may also be changed in the Info system.
23. Resume Demo If Demo Mode (see Mixer Setup) is On, and the Demo is stopped, touching this button restarts the Demo without having to wait for the 15-minute timeout.)
1001108-01-E
93
Remote Control Settings
Allows or restricts access to mixer functionality by device.
Menu
Remote Control
NOTE!: When a remote device is set to Personal Monitor Mix, the Cue and Mute buttons are not available on the Aux-Mixon-Faders.
NOTE!: Some AndroidTM devices use the model number as the device name. This may cause contentions if there is more than one of the same model device (name) connected to TouchMix. To avoid this situation, turn on Bluetooth on the Android device, and change the device's name to something unique. Bluetooth must remain on to prevent reverting to the model number.
Main Mix L/R
Remote Control Settings
Joe's Monitor
Aux 1
Aux 2
Aux 2
Aux 3
Aux 3
Aux 4
Aux 4
Aux 5
Aux 5
Aux 6
Aux 6
Aux 7
Aux 7
Aux 8
Aux 8
Aux 9
Aux 9
1 Devices Joe's iPhone House iPad George's Android
Access Control:
Personal Monitor Mix
2
2a
Main Mix
2b
Record
2c
User Buttons
Aux 10
When a new device connects to the mixer's network
Aux 10
Aux 11
and the TouchMix Control App is launched, the mixer
Aux 11
displays a message indicating that a new device is
Aux 12
Aux 12
connected.
Aux 13
1. Devices Displays a list of devices that are or have Aux13 Aux 14
been connected to the mixer. Touch a device name
Aux 14
to set up its access.
4
Remove Device
2. Personal Monitor Mix Enables access to a combination of these functions.
a. Main Mix Control of the Main mix functions.
b. Record Control of the recording transport and setup function.
c. User Buttons Access to the User Buttons.
d. Auxiliary Channels Access to one or more aux channel (stage monitor) mixes.
3. Full Access The device has access to all software controlled mixer functions.
· Security Settings (not shown) If enabled, a password is required. See the Security topic.
4. Remove Device Removes the selected device from the list.
5. Save Saves the settings and sends a message to the device listing available functions.
Press Menu
Full Access
3
2d
Aux 1 Aux 1 Aux 2 Aux 2 Aux 3 Aux 3 Aux 4 Aux 4 Aux 5 Aux 5 Aux 6 Aux 6 Aux 7 Aux 7
Aux 8 Aux 8 Aux 9 Aux 9 Aux 10 Aux 10 Aux 11 Aux 11 Aux 12 Aux 12 Aux 13 Aux 13 Aux 14 Aux 14
5
Save
Touch Remote Control
Scene: Default
Main
Cue
Main
L/R
10
5 L
u F
5
10
0
20
40
Mute
1001108-01-E
94
User Buttons
Assign alternate functions to the User Buttons.
1. User 1 through User 8 Displays the current Detail (function) assigned to the selected User 18 button. Touch a button to edit its function.
2. User Button Name Displays the Detail name associated with the selected User 18 button. Changing the function assigned to the button will automatically enter a new name, or touch the keyboard icon to enter a custom name.
3. a. Action, b. Selection, c. Detail Select an item from each list in the order shown.
4. Assign Touch to complete the assignment. 5. Reset Resets the selected User 18 button to
default setting. Alternate Method of setting a User button to navigate to a specific screen. Does not apply to remote devices.
1. Navigate to the desired screen. 2. Press and hold a user button for 2 3 seconds. 3. Upon release, a message displays. Touch Yes to
accept the change or Cancel to reject it. 4. If desired, assign the user button a friendly name
from the User Button Setup screen. To return the user button to the factory default, press it one time to access the assigned page. Then push and hold the user button for 2-3 seconds.
Press Menu
Touch User Buttons
Menu
User Buttons
Main Mix L/R
1 User 1
Nav Left
User 2
Clear Clip
User 3
Clear Cue
User 4
Nav Right
User 5
Play/Stop
User 6
Record/Stop
User 7
Copy
User 8
Paste
Scene: Default
Joe's Monitor
Aux 1
2
Nav Left
Aux 2
Aux 2
Aux 3
Aux 3
Aux 4
Aux 4
Aux 5
Aux 5
Aux 6
Aux 6
Aux 7
Aux 7
Aux 8
3a
Action
Recall Input Preset Recall Output Preset Recall Scene Mute Go to Screen Recording Select Utility Tap Tempo
Aux 8
Aux 9
Aux 9
Aux 10
Aux 10
Aux 11
Aux 11
Aux 12
Aux 12
Aux 13
Aux 13
Aux 14
Aux 14
4 Assign
5 Reset
3b
Selection Selected Parameter Clear Pitch Correct Miscellaneous
3c
Detail Nav Left Nav Right Fader to 0 dB Fader o
Main
Cue
Main
L/R
10
5 L
u AF
5
10
0
20
40
Mute
NOTE!: PITCH CORRECT This function disables or enables the Pitch Correct feature, it does not affect the assignment of the feature to a channel. The only way to tell if this feature is enabled or disabled at the User Button level is to see if you can hear a difference when Pitch Correct is assigned to a channel. If you select Utility > Pitch Correct >, you need two user buttons, one to enable the feature, the other to disable it. Refer to the Pitch Correction topic for information about assigning or enabling Pitch Correct for a channel.
User button defaults:
TouchMix-30 Pro · U1 Navigate Left (moves the selection left)
TouchMix-8 / TouchMix-16 · U1 Navigate Left (moves the selection left)
· U2 Clear Clip (clears clipping indication from the Nav Strip) · U2 Copy (see Copy & Paste)
· U3 Clear Cue (clears all cue selections)
· U3 Paste (see Copy & Paste)
· U4 Navigate Right (moves the selection right)
· U4 Navigate Right (moves the selection right)
· U5 Play/Stop (starts or stops playback)
· U5 Play/Stop (Tablet app only)
· U6 Rec/Stop (starts or stops recording)
· U6 Rec/Stop (Tablet app only)
· U7 Copy (see Copy & Paste)
· U7 Clear Clip (Tablet app only)
· U8 Paste (see Copy & Paste)
· U8 Clear Cue (Tablet app only)
1001108-01-E
95
Mixer Setup
Controls for various global and utility functions.
Press Menu
Touch Mixer Setup
1. Cue Mode Sets the function of the channel Cue buttons.
· Cue (Default) Touching a channel cue button causes the channel's signal to be heard in the Cue headphones. The audio signal is otherwise unaffected.
· SIP (Solo In Place) Input Cue buttons change color (orange) and are labelled SIP. Touching a channel's SIP button causes all other inputs to mute. Cue continues to function normally for outputs. SIP is a very useful setup function but can produce unwanted results if left on during performance.
2. Cue Pickoff Determines if the Cue signal is derived pre or post-fader.
· PFL (Pre-Fader Listen)
· AFL (After-Fader Listen)
3. Sample Rate Selects the sample frequency (bit rate) for the mixer. Most relevant for recording. Typically, 44100 is used for audio CD, and 48000 for audio with video.
4. Dynamics Processing (global) Determines whether all input channel gates and compressors are controlled by a pre or post EQ signal.
Menu
Mixer Setup
Main Mix L/R
Joe's Monitor
Aux 1
Aux 2
Aux 2
1
Aux 3
Aux 3
Aux 4
2
Aux 4
Aux 5
3
Aux 5
Aux 6
Aux 6
4
Aux 7
Aux 7
Aux 8
5 Demo Mode
Aux 8
Aux 9
6
Aux 9
Aux 10
Aux 10
Aux 11
Aux 11
8
Save System Log to USB
Aux 12
Aux 12
Aux 13
Aux 13
11
Aux 14
Aux 14
Display Brightness
Scene: Default
Main
7
1.00
9
Clear Storage
10
Reset Mixer
12 Start Upgrade (must download rst)
13 Check and Download Upgrade
14
End User Agreement
Cue
Main
L/R
10
5 L
u F
5
10
0
20
40
Mute
5. Demo Mode and Confirm Mute
· Demo Mode (Mixer only) The mixer is set at the factory to display a slide show of features until the screen is touched. This control turns the demo on/off.
· Confirm Mute on Master (tablets only) By default, muting a master output (Main or Aux bus) requires a confirmation. This switch eliminates the confirmation step.
6. Omit Levels on Paste Overview Provides an option to omit all level settings when pasting to an overview screen.
7. Display Brightness Controls the brightness of the LCD screen and illuminated buttons.
8. Save System Log to USB Writes a file to USB that may be useful in software troubleshooting.
9. Clear Storage Deletes all user-defined presets and scenes from the mixer. Does not delete presets or scenes stored on a USB device.
10. Reset Mixer Resets all mixer controls to factory default. This does not erase any user presets on the mixer or on a USB drive.
11. Software Version Label Displays the version number of the currently installed firmware.
12. Start Upgrade (Must Download First) Begins the process of upgrading mixer software. Before starting, either visit www.qsc.com for upgrade instructions and to download the latest firmware version, or go to the following step.
13. Check and Download Upgrade This function is available on TouchMix-30 Pro with version 1.1 or higher and TouchMix-8 and TouchMix-16 with version 3.0 or higher. You must have an Internet connection and a USB drive (with about 250 MB free) to download the upgrade files. When you use this method, follow the instructions on the screen. The mixer checks for the latest version, and downloads it automatically. If you have the latest version, you will get a message indicating that.
NOTE!: For the TouchMix-30 Pro the Internet connection can be wired, or wireless via a compatible wireless adapter (Part # CP-000033-00 is available from QSC) connecting to a wireless router with Internet access.
For the TouchMix-8 and TouchMix-16 you must connect via the wireless adapter to a wireless router with Internet access. or to a router using a USB to Ethernet adapter.
14. End User Agreement Displays the End User License Agreement for your reading pleasure.
1001108-01-E
96
Phantom Power
Supplies +48 VDC to XLR Inputs including Talkback. 1. Reset Returns all settings to factory default (all
phantom power off). 2. Input Channel buttons Touch to enable or
disable phantom power for the channel. 3. Rear Panel View XLRs Touch to enable or
disable phantom power for the channel.
NOTE!: Phantom power may also be controlled from the Setup screen of each input channel.
NOTE!: It is good practice to turn off phantom power when connecting or disconnecting an input. "Hot patching" a device can cause severe transients and potentially damaging current surges.
Press Mic 48V
1001108-01-E
97
Mute Nroups
Mute Groups provide a means of muting multiple inputs and outputs from a single control.
About Mute Nroups
When a channel is in one or more Mute Groups, all Mute Groups containing the same channel and the Channel Mute itself, must be unmuted for audio to pass. When a channel is muted by a mute group, its mute button will be colored orange.
Mute Nroups Screen
1. Edit Touch the Edit button to add or remove channels from Mute Groups.
2. Mute Nroup Touch any button to activate or deactivate the Mute Group.
Mute Groups
Main Mix L/R
Mute Groups
Joe's Monitor
Aux 1
Aux 2
Aux 2
Aux 3
Aux 3
Aux 4
Aux 4
Aux 5
Aux 5
Aux 6
Aux 6
Aux 7
Aux 7
Aux 8
Aux 8
Aux 9
Aux 9
Aux 10
Aux 10
Aux 11
Aux 11
Aux 12
Aux 12
Aux 13
Aux 13
Aux 14
Aux 14
1
Mute 1
Mute
5
Mute 5
Mute
2
Mute 2
Mute
3
Mute 3
2
Mute
6
Mute 6
Mute
7
Mute 7
Mute
Press Mute Groups
Scene: Default
1
Edit
Main
4
Mute 4
Mute
8
Mute 8
Mute
Cue
Main
L/R
10
5 L
u F
5
10
0
20
40
Mute
Mute Nroup Edit Screen
1. Mute Group select Selects a Mute Group for editing.
2. User-defined name Touch the name to display a keyboard that may be used to enter a name for the Mute Group.
3. Mute Mutes / unmutes the channels assigned to the Mute Group being edited.
4. Clear Assignments Clears all assignments from the selected Mute Group.
5. Close Edit Returns to the Mute Group Mute screen.
6. System-assigned channel numbers. 7. Assignment Assigns / unassigns a channel to
the selected mute group and indicates assignment status. 8. When a channel is muted by a Mute Group, the color of the channel's Mute button is orange. When a channel is muted by the channel Mute button and a Mute Group, the channel's Mute button is red. All mutes associated with a channel must be unmuted for audio to pass.
NOTE!: Mute Groups may be assigned to User Buttons. See the User Button topic for more.
Press Mute Groups
Touch Edit
Mute Groups
Edit
FX
Main Mix L/R
1
Mute Joe
Mute 2
Mute 3
Mute 4
Mute 5
Mute 6
Mute 7
Mute 8
Scene: Default
Joe's Monitor
Aux 1
2 Mute Group Name
Mute Joe
3 Mute
4
5
Clear Assignments
Close Edit
Aux 2
Aux 2
Aux 3
Aux 3
Aux 4
Aux 4
Aux 5
Aux 5
Aux 6
Aux 6
Aux 7
Inputs
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
7 Joe's
Vocal
In 2
In 3
In 4
In 5
In 6
In 7
In 8
In 9 In 10 In 11 In 12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
In 13 In 14 In 15 In 16 In 17 In 18 In 19 In 20 In 21 In 22 In 23 In 24
25/26
Stereo In 25/26
27/28
Stereo In 27/28
29/30
Stereo In 29/30
Aux 7
Aux 8
Aux 8
Outputs
Aux 9
Aux 9
Aux 10
Aux 1 Aux 2 Aux 3 Aux 4 Aux 5 Aux 6 Aux 7 Aux 8 Aux 9 Aux 10 Aux 11 Aux 12 Aux 13 Aux 14
Joe's Monitor
Aux 2
Aux 3
Aux 4
Aux 5
Aux 6
Aux 7
Aux 8
Aux 9 Aux 10 Aux 11 Aux 12 Aux 13 Aux 14
Aux 10
Aux 11
FX 1 FX 2 FX 3 FX 4 FX 5 FX 6
USB
Aux 11
Aux 12
FX 1 FX 2 FX 3 FX 4 FX 5 FX 6
2-Trk PB
Aux 12
Aux 13
L/R
Aux 13
Aux 14
Main
Aux 14
Main
Cue
Main
L/R
10
5 L
u F
5
10
0
20
40
8
Mute
1001108-01-E
98
Record / Playback (Multitrack USB Drive)
Provides the controls to record and playback
multiple channels.
Rec/
Play
Record / Playback Main Screen
IMPORTANT!: All USB memory devices must be formatted as FAT32. Drive performance is critical for recording. For more information and to see a list of qualified drives, visit qsc. com.
Recording Mode
Multitrack
USB Drive
Press Rec/Play
Touch Recording
Mode
Touch Multitrack USB Drive
NOTE!: At the end of a session, the recording must be stopped using the Stop/ Pause control. Stopping the recording writes a header file that is required for the tracks to play.
NOTE!: All the standard channel controls act as they do regardless of record / playback status. For example, if you Mute the channel that is recording, the output gets muted, but recording of the input continues.
1. Input Channel controls All input channel controls function as they do from the Home screen. 2. Arm Arms the channel to be recorded when the Record button is pressed. Displays here and on the Home screen . 3. Track When engaged, selects a recorded track as the audio source for the channel instead of the analog input. 4. USB Session Displays the name of the active multi-track recording session. 5. Transport controls Standard transport controls; Return to Start, Rewind, Play, Forward, Pause and Record. 6. Total record time counter The total length of the recording in HH:MM:SS. If recording is in progress, this number grows until the recording
is ended. 7. Recording Mode Displays a panel for selection of Stereo MP3, Multitrack or DAW (see the MP3 Audio Player and DAW topics). 8. Set Moves the Locate pointer to the position of the Play pointer. 9. No To Moves the Play pointer to the position of the Locate pointer. 10. Play pointer Indicates current record/playback position. 11. Locate pointer Marks a location on the Time Line. The locate pointer may be moved by dragging on screen, by selecting and turning the
Master Encoder or using the Set button. 12. Progress indicator Represents the session time line.
NOTE!: Due to FAT23 file size limitations, the max continuous recording time is roughly three hours. A warning message is displayed 10 minutes before the limit is reached. To continue recording, pause and then resume. It is not necessary to create a new session. (see "Recording Directory Structure" for more).
13. Time code display Displays position of the Play pointer in HH:MM:SS. Maximum record time is determined by the capacity of the attached hard-disc drive.
14. Recording Setup Navigates to the Recording Setup screen.
1001108-01-E
99
2-Trk - Recording
The Main L/R or Aux 13/14 can be recorded on a USB
device, then played back using 2-Trk Playback.
2-Trk Recording Setup
Stereo In/2-Trk
Inputs 1-8
2-Trk Rec
Setup
Main Mix
The files created from recording are on the external USB L/R
Touch Home
Touch Stereo In/2-Trk
Touch 2-Trk Rec
Setup
Prev
Next
Scene: Default
device installed in the mixer USB port. The files can be found under <session name>.tmRecord\Track31\ Region-1.wav and \Track32\Region-1.wav.
You can stop recording, then resume and two more files are created: \Track31\Region-2 and Track32\
Joe's Ears
Aux 1
Aux 2
Aux 2
Aux 3
Aux 3
Aux 4
1
Record
2-Trk Rec
Record Source
2
Select
Aux 13/14
Main LR
Record Pick-O
3
Pre
Post
Reset
2-Trk Rec
Main
Recording
4
Arm
Cue
Cue
L
C
R
Region-2. The files in each directory are concatenated
Aux 4
Aux 5
for seamless playback using 2-Trk Playback.
Aux 5
5
Export 2-Track
Record
R
Main
L/R
Aux 6
For TouchMix-8 Tracks 13 and 14
Aux 6
TouchMix-16 Tracks 21 and 22
Aux 7
Aux 7
1. Channel Name Touch the record field to change
Aux 8
Aux 8
the channel name.
Aux 9
10
10
5
5
L
L
u
u
G
F
5
48
5
10 10
2. Record Source Select buttons Select the
Aux 9
Aux 10
source for 2-Trk recording. Main L/R or Aux 13/14.
Aux 10
0
20
0
20
3. Record Pick-Off switch Determines if the
Aux 11
Aux 11
recorded audio is:
Aux 12
· Post affected by the channel EQ and
Aux 12
Aux 13
Dynamics, or
Aux 13
40
40
· Pre is not affected by the channel EQ and
Aux 14
Mute
Aux 14
Dynamics.
4. Recording Arm button When engaged, the
source channels you selected are recorded when recording begins. This button is also available on the Record/Play screen.
5. Export 2-Trk (TouchMix-30 Pro only) Converts 2-track wave recording to MP3. Note that this operation is processor intensive and will take some
time.
1001108-01-E
100
DA Record / Playback (TouchMix-30 Pro only)
Record to and Playback from a Digital Audio Workstation.
Rec/
IMPORTANT!: The TouchMix-30 Pro is
Play
capable of 32 x 32 channel USB audio
interface to Windows and macOS
computers. Windows interface requires a
driver available for download from QSC. No
driver is required for macOS operation.
Recording Mode
1. Track button Touch the Track button to select a DAW track as the source for the channel.
2. DA Indicates if the mixer is receiving audio from the DAW (Connected) or not (Not Receiving Audio).
3. Sample Rate switch Switches the mixers sample rate between 44.1 kHz and 48 kHz. The mixer must be the sample rate clock master.
4. Recording Mode button Touch this to change the Recording Mode to MP3 Playback or Multitrack USB.
5. Channel Activity Lights to indicate audio is being received from the DAW on that channel.
NOTE!: To manage connections on the Mac Open "Audio MIDI Setup" and select "QSC TM30 Pro.
Multitrack
DAW
Press Rec / Play
Touch Recording
Mode
Touch Multitrack
DAW
1001108-01-E
101
Real-time Analyzer (RTA) Press
Displays a real-time analyzer (RTA) for the
RTA
selected source.
RTA
· TouchMix-30 Pro Up to two RTA displays
are available at a time on any combination
of mixer and tablet devices.
· TouchMix-8 and TouchMix-16 have one RTA.
· The RTA is not available on phone devices.
1. The system and friendly name for the RTA Source.
2. RTA Graph 28, 1/3 octave bands, with peak-hold indicators available for the tablet devices only.
3. RTA Source Selectable outputs for the RTA Source 14 Aux outputs, Main L/R, Talkback, and Follow Cue. When set to Follow Cue, the RTA displays the audio present on the Cue mix. Whatever is being heard on the Cue headphones will be displayed on the RTA.
4. Source Master channel When you select an output source from the main RTA screen, the master controls for the output bus are available.
1001108-01-E
102
Scenes
Scenes provide the ability to store and recall all mix parameters.
1. Current Scene Displays the name of the most recently recalled scene.
Scene: Default
OR Menu
Scenes
2. Save / Save As button Displays a page with
options for naming a scene and selecting internal or
1
USB storage.
3. Factory scenes list A library of preset scenes representing mixer settings for a variety of bands, productions and styles. Factory memory is readonly.
3
4
4. Mixer scenes list Displays a list of scenes that have been saved to the mixer's internal memory.
5. USB list Displays a list of scenes that have been saved to an attached USB memory. device.
6. Copy to USB Copies the selected scene from Internal memory to an attached USB memory device.
7. Copy to Mixer Copies the selected scene from an attached USB memory device to Internal memory.
8. Delete Deletes the selected Internal or External scene.
9. Recall Recalls the selected Scene.
10. Recall Options Scenes are saved with all parameters but it isn't always desireable to recall all parameters. This section can be set so that some mixer settings are not effected by a scene recall.
86
9
10
10a
a. Omit Levels Mix levels including Aux sends, FX sends and Output levels are uneffected.
b. Omit Outputs Output EQ, Anti-Feedback, Comp/Limiter are uneffected.
c. Omit Routing Sub Group and Main L/R assignments are uneffected.
Touch Scenes
OR
Touch Menu
2 5
7
8
10b
10c
Touch Scenes
IMPORTANT!: It is possible to recall TouchMix-8 and TouchMix-16 scenes on a TouchMix-30 Pro. Of course the TouchMix-30 Pro has far more inputs and outputs. These excess inputs and outputs will be set to factory default values.
1001108-01-E
103
Channel Safe
Channel Safe prevents channel settings from being changed when a Scene is recalled. You can set the Channel Safe property for inputs on an Input Channel's Setup screen, and for outputs on an Output Channel's Setup screen. The Channel Safe screen provides the capability of setting multiple channels to safe in one place.
1. Clear Safe Channels Touch this button to remove the Channel Safe from all channels.
2. Inputs Touch each Input channel you wish to keep safe.
3. Outputs Touch each Output channel you wish to keep safe.
Press
Touch Channel
Menu
Safe
Channel
Menu
Safe
FX
Main Mix L/R
Channel Safe
Scene: Default
Joe's Monitor
Aux 1
Aux 2
Aux 2
Aux 3
Aux 3
Aux 4
Aux 4
Aux 5
Aux 5
Aux 6
Aux 6
Aux 7
Aux 7
Aux 8
Aux 8
Aux 9
Aux 9
Aux 10
Aux 10
Aux 11
Aux 11
Aux 12
Aux 12
Aux 13
Aux 13
Aux 14
Aux 14
Select Channels to Safe during Scene Recall
Inputs 2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Joe's Vocal
In 2
In 3
In 4
In 5
In 6
In 7
In 8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
In 9 In 10 In 11 In 12 In 13 In 14 In 15 In 16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
In 17 In 18 In 19 In 20 In 21 In 22 In 23 In 24
1
Clear Safe Channels
USB 2-Trk PB
25/26 27/28 29/30
Stereo In Stereo In Stereo In
25/26
27/28
29/30
Outputs 3
Aux 1 Aux 2 Aux 3 Aux 4 Aux 5 Aux 6 Aux 7 Aux 8 Aux 9 Aux 10 Aux 11 Aux 12 Aux 13 Aux 14
Joe's Monitor
Aux 2
Aux 3
Aux 4
Aux 5
Aux 6
Aux 7
Aux 8
Aux 9 Aux 10 Aux 11 Aux 12 Aux 13 Aux 14
L/R
Main
Main
Cue
Main
L/R
10
5 L
u F
5
10
0
20
40
Mute
1001108-01-E
104
Auto Mixer TouchMix-30 Pro
Automatic Microphone Mixer (TouchMix-30 only)
Menu
Auto-Mixer
Description
Menu
Auto Mixer
An Automatic Microphone Mixer (Auto-Mixer) works by
comparing the signal levels of the assigned channels and
applying an algorithm that determines which talker (or
talkers) is (are) currently speaking. The Auto-Mixer then
sends a control command to the channels that allocates
more gain to the channels with an active talker and less to
the channels with an inactive talker. As a result feedback
and extraneous noise (such as paper rustling from
panelists or HVAC) are reduced. The Auto-Mixer simply
rides gain on the assigned channels. It does not have any
effect on signal routing. The Auto-Mixer will affect any
Aux mixes that are assigned post-fader but will not affect
pre-fader Aux sends.
Auto-Mixers are most commonly used for speech
applications such as conferences, presentations or
1
panel discussions in which there are multiple talkers and
multiple microphones. They also may be used in theatrical
2
sound reinforcement. Auto-Mixers are not intended to mix
3
entire bands although they have been used successfully
on horn sections and backing vocal ensembles.
5
The TouchMix-30 Automatic Microphone Mixer (Auto-Mixer)
4
is a gain sharing design that is available for all 24 mic/line
6
input channels. There are two independent Auto-Mixers.
Accessing the Auto-Mixer
To access the Auto-Mixer: Menu > Auto-Mixer It may be convenient to assign a User Button to the Auto-Mixer. To assign a User Button to the Auto-Mixer: Menu > User Buttons > Select a button from User 1 8 1. In the Action panel, select Go To Screen 2. In the Selection panel, select Other 3. In the Detail panel, select Auto-Mix 4. Touch the Assign button
Auto-Mixer Controls and Indicators
The Auto-Mixer Home Screen maintains the mixer's usual channel paradigm. Cue and Mute buttons function normally. The channel fader is shortened to allow room for Auto-Mixer controls. Controls are:
1. Auto-Mix Enables (blue) or disables (gray) Auto-Mix for the channel. When disabled, the channel functions normally. 2. 1 and 2 Two independent Auto-Mixers are available. These controls assign the channel to Auto-Mix group Auto-Mix 1 or Auto-Mix 2. A blue
button indicates the group to which the channel is assigned. 3. Sensitivity Adjusts the sensitivity of the channel to compensate for loud or soft spoken talkers. 4. Auto-Mix 1 and Auto-Mix 2 switches
a. Out (gray) disables the Auto-Mixer b. In (blue) enables the Auto-Mixer
5. Maximum Attenuation Sets the maximum attenuation that the Auto-Mixer will apply to the channels. For most applications this should be left at its default value of 60 dB. But there may be circumstances in which it is desirable to limit how much attenuation the Auto-Mixer will apply.
6. Metering Mode There are two metering modes for the Auto-Mixer. a. Gain Only Displays a meter that indicates the total gain applied to the channel by the fader and the Auto-Mixer. The Gain meter is inactive when the associated channel is not assigned to the Auto-Mixer. b. Level & Gain Simultaneously displays the standard (green, yellow, red) channel signal-level meter on the left, and the Gain meter on the right (blue meter).
1001108-01-E
105
External Control Surfaces - TouchMix-30 Pro
The TouchMix-30 Pro includes the capability to interface with third party control surfaces with motorized faders. QSC has verified operation with the following control surfaces. Refer to the documentation delivered with the control surface, or the company's website for connection and operation.
· iCon Platform M+ This controller offers the best match of features to the requirements of controlling the TouchMix-30 Pro and is recommended.
· Behringer XTouch Compact Lacks some useful controls but is useable.
· PreSonus FaderPort 8 There are only eight faders so the master fader for the selected mix is not available on the control surface. All control of mixer outputs must be done on the TouchMix-30 Pro screen or app.
· Other Control Surfaces Other current or discontinued control surfaces using MCP (Mackie Control Protocol) may work but QSC cannot provide any assistance for these devices.
Channel Strip View
With physical faders in use, it is no longer necessary to
display the graphic faders on the mixer or tablet screen. The
Menu
channel strip view replaces the on-screen faders. There are
External Faders
two ways to display the Channel Strip view.
Press Menu
Press External Faders
The channel strips present controls and indicators for the channels in the selected fader Bank.
1. Channel Name / Select Displays the user-defined channel name and, when touched, displays one of the processing pages.
2. Pan Indicates and controls placement of the channel in the stereo sound field.
3. EQ Displays a graphic representation of the channel's EQ setting. Touch the image to go to the channel's EQ page.
4. Track Selects a recorded track (USB multi-track or DAW depending on the Recording Mode setting) as the source for the channel.
5. Arm If USB multi-track is selected as the recording mode, this control arms / disarms the track for recording.
6. Comp Indicates whether the compressor is engaged / disengaged. Touch to navigate to the compressor screen. The meter to the right displays compressor activity.
1 2
3
4
5
6 11
7 8
9
10
7. Nate Indicates whether the gate is engaged / disengaged. Touch to navigate to the gate screen. The meter to the right displays gate activity.
8. 48V Engages / disengages phantom power for the channel. 9. Meter Indicates channel signal level. 10. Assignments Indicates assignment to Main L/R and Sub Groups 8 1. 11. Anti-FB (output channels only) Navigates to the Anti-feedback filters screen.
1001108-01-E
106
Custom Fader Banks - TouchMix-30 Pro
The TouchMix-30 Pro mixer supports 3 Custom Fader
banks. By default, the custom fader bank assignments are
identical to the standard input fader banks Inputs 1-8,
Menu
Inputs 9-16 and Inputs 17-24. The customized banks are
Custom Banks
saved as part of the scene.
1
Set up the Custom Fader Banks 2
Press Menu > Custom Banks. The custom banks screen displays.
3
1. Press one of the Custom Bank tabs (1) to edit.
2. Use the Name field (2) to give the bank a custom name. This name displays in the Custom Bank tab (1). The characters you can use as the name are restricted to standard letters on the English (US) keyboard. If you select a restricted character, the following message displays.
Invalid character(s) detected. Please use standard keys
on the English (US) keyboard, and omit the following
chararacters: \ $ % ~ < > ? , ; @ # * | : « £ ¥
4
OK
3. Each bank has eight Channel faders (3). Select a Channel fader button.
4. Select a channel (4) to assign to the selected Channel fader (3). Any of the following chanels (4) may be assigned to the selected Channel fader: Inputs, Aux Masters, FX Returns, Sub Group Masters or DCA Group Masters. These channels may be assigned in any order.
IMPORTANT! The assignment is effective immediately.
5. Press the Reset button to return all three Custom Banks to their default assignments.
Press Menu
Press Custom Banks
5
1001108-01-E
107
DCA Nroup Assignments
DCA Groups are used to vary the gain of several channels at once from a single fader without changing the position of the channel faders. DCA groups also include a mute function.
NOTE!: DCA Groups may also be accessed by touching Menu > DCA Groups.
About DCA Groups
· When a channel is in one or more DCA Groups, the output of that channel is equal to the sum of the DCA fader settings and channel fader settings.
· When a channel is in one or more DCA Groups, the channel and all the DCA Groups must be unmuted for audio to pass. The same rule applies when a channel is in a DCA, and Mute Group all must be unmuted for audio to pass.
1. DCA Select button Selects the associated DCA group for editing.
2. User-defined name field Touch the name field to display a keyboard that may be used to enter a name for the DCA Group.
3. Clear Assignments button Clears all assignments from the selected DCA Group.
Press Home
Touch DCA Groups
Touch a DCA
DCA Groups
DCA 1
FX
Inputs 1-8
Main Mix L/R
1
My DCA
DCA 2
DCA 3
DCA 4
DCA 5
DCA 6
DCA 7
DCA 8
Prev
Next
Scene: Default
2 Joe's Monitor
Aux 1
My DCA
3 Clear Assignments
Aux 2
Aux 2
Aux 3
Aux 3
Aux 4
Aux 4
Aux 5
Aux 5
Aux 6
Aux 6
Aux 7
Inputs
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
5
In 1
In 2
In 3
In 4
In 5
In 6
In 7
In 8
In 9 In 10 In 11 In 12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
In 13 In 14 In 15 In 16 In 17 In 18 In 19 In 20 In 21 In 22 In 23 In 24
25/26
Stereo In 25/26
27/28
Stereo In 27/28
29/30
Stereo In 29/30
Aux 7
Aux 8
Aux 8
Outputs
Aux 9
Aux 9
Aux 10
Aux 1 Aux 2 Aux 3 Aux 4 Aux 5 Aux 6 Aux 7 Aux 8 Aux 9 Aux 10 Aux 11 Aux 12 Aux 13 Aux 14
Joe's Monitor
Aux 2
Aux 3
Aux 4
Aux 5
Aux 6
Aux 7
Aux 8
Aux 9 Aux 10 Aux 11 Aux 12 Aux 13 Aux 14
Aux 10
Aux 11
FX 1 FX 2 FX 3 FX 4 FX 5 FX 6
USB
Aux 11
Aux 12
FX 1 FX 2 FX 3 FX 4 FX 5 FX 6
2-Trk PB
Aux 12
Aux 13
L/R
Aux 13
Aux 14
Main
Aux 14
Main
Cue
Main
L/R
10
5 L
u F
5
10
0
20
40
6
Mute
4. DCA system name label This name does not change.
5. Assignment buttons Touch one of the channel Assignment buttons to add the channel to the selected DCA Group. Inputs, outputs and FX returns may be assigned to DCA Groups.
6. Main muted The orange color of the mute button indicates that the channel is muted from a group, such as DCA or Mute Groups.
1001108-01-E
108
MIDI
The MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) Setup provides the means to use a "class compliant" USB MIDI foot switch to control many functions of the TouchMix mixer. This screen is not available on remote devices.
QSC has verified proper operation with these USB MIDI foot-switches: iCON G-BOARD and Logidy UMI3
Press
Touch MIDI
Menu
Setup
Menu
MIDI
Main Mix L/R
1
MIDI 1 Drums
MIDI 2 Not in use
MIDI 3 Not in use
Joe's Monitor
Aux 1
2
DrumNasme
Drums
MIDI 4 Not in use
MIDI 5 Not in use
MIDI 6 Not in use
MIDI 7 Not in use
MIDI 8 Not in use
Scene: Default
3
Assign
4
Unassign
Main
Aux 2
NOTE!: Only On/Off commands are
Aux 2
supported. The mixer does not respond to
Aux 3
continuous controller data.
Aux 3
Aux 4
Aux 4
1. MIDI Functions The current MIDI assignments
Aux 5
Aux 5
are displayed on MIDI buttons 1 8. Blue indicates
Aux 6
the MIDI function is selected and can be assigned/
Aux 6
unassigned or renamed.
Aux 7
Aux 7
2. Name Displays the name of the currently
Aux 8
assigned MIDI function. A name is automatically
Aux 8
Aux 9
assigned when a function is selected in the Action,
Aux 9
Selection, Detail fields.
Aux 10
Aux 10
3. Assign button After making your selection, touch Aux 11
this button to assign your selection to the selected
Aux 11
Aux 12
MIDI.
Aux 12
5 Action Recall Input Preset Recall Output Preset Recall Scene Mute Go to Screen Recording Select Utility
6 Selection Factory User Relative
7 Detail Default Horn Band Rock Band Country Drum Sub Mix Jazz Quintet Rock Band 1 Rock Band 2 Songwriter
Cue
Main
L/R
10
5 L
u F
5
10
0
20
40
4. Unassign Touch this button to remove the assignment to the selected MIDI button.
Aux 13
Aux 13
Aux 14
8
MIDI Assignment
No MIDI Assignment
5. Action This list is a general list of types of things
Aux 14
the MIDI controller can affect. For example "Recall
Scene".
9 Learn MIDI
Mute
6. Selection When an Action is chosen, a list of ways the action can be applied are displayed. For example "Factory".
7. Detail Displays a list of specific targets for the selection. For example "Drum Sub Mix".
8. MIDI Assignment The name of the assignment made internally to the USB MIDI device button.
9. Learn MIDI
a. Touch this button to teach the TouchMix what MIDI command should trigger the selected action.
b. A message displays saying, "Waiting for incoming MIDI message..."
c. Press a button on the USB MIDI device.
d. When the USB MIDI device button is pressed, the TouchMix responds by executing the assigned function.
1001108-01-E
109
Talkback / Noise
This screen controls the routing and level of Talkback and Noise.
1. Reset button Restores factory defaults for the Talkback / Noise Generator.
2. Assignment buttons Select the destination for the noise or talkback signals. Note that it is possible to route talkback to the FX devices. This is very useful when auditioning and selecting effects.
3. Talkback (Measurement) Mic Adjusts the level of the talkback signal to the assigned outputs. -Inf (Infinity) is off.
4. Enable (Talkback) Touch to enable Talkback, touch again to disable Talkback. Unlike the mixer's hold-to-talk Talk button, this button is latching. When enabled, the hold-to-talk button is illuminated. On tablet devices, both Talk and Enable are latching.
5. Mic Phantom Enables 48V phantom power to the Talkback microphone input.
6. Noise Nenerator Adjusts the level of the noise signal to the assigned outputs. -Inf (Infinity) is off.
7. Enable (Noise) Touch to enable Noise, touch again to disable Noise.
Press
Touch
Menu
Talkback
Menu
Talkback
FX
Main Mix L/R
Talkback / Noise Generator
Scene: Default
Joe's Monitor
Aux 1
Select outputs for Talkback/Noise Generator
1 Reset
Aux 2
Aux 2
Aux 3
Aux 3
Aux 4
Aux 4
Aux 1
2
Joe's Monitor
Aux 2 Aux 2
Aux 3 Aux 3
Aux 4 Aux 4
Aux 5 Aux 5
Aux 6 Aux 6
Aux 7 Aux 7
Aux 8 Aux 8
Aux 9 Aux 10 Aux 11 Aux 12 Aux 13 Aux 14 Aux 9 Aux 10 Aux 11 Aux 12 Aux 13 Aux 14
Aux 5
Aux 5
Aux 6
Aux 6
FX 1
2
FX 1
FX 2 FX 2
FX 3 FX 3
FX 4 FX 4
FX 5 FX 5
FX 6 FX 6
L/R
2
Main
Aux 7
Aux 7
Aux 8
Aux 8
Aux 9
Aux 9
Aux 10
Talkback (Measurement)
Mic
Noise Generator
Aux 10
Aux 11
Aux 11
Aux 12
-40.0
3
Mic Phantom
-40.0
6
Aux 12
Aux 13
Aux 13
4
Enable
5 48V
7
Enable
Aux 14
Aux 14
1001108-01-E
110
TouchMix i-Fi Control
Manage the mixer's wireless or wired network. Connect an iPad, or iPhone (iOS 6 or later) or Android device (5.0 or later). The network configuration can only be performed on the TouchMix.
Before You Begin
For smaller spaces with fewer potential sources of interference, a USB Wi-Fi Adapter such as that supplied with the TouchMix-8 and TouchMix-16 will work well. But USB adapters are going to have less range than external routers due to their lower-powered transmitters and tiny, less efficient antennas. In a larger space with more potential interference and more mission-critical remote control requirements it's better to have a higherpowered device with more efficient antennas. That's why there is no USB Wi-Fi Adapter included with the TouchMix-30 Pro it's likely to be used in more demanding applications and an external Wi-Fi router is the best solution. That said, the TouchMix-30 Pro will work with the QSC-supplied USB Wi-Fi adapter marked with an "N". It is available here https://parts.qsc.com/cp-000033-00 . But be aware that its range and connection reliability will be inferior to most external routers. TouchMix mixers support multiple ways of connecting to your wireless devices.
i-Fi Router Access Point
In this implementation, a Wi-Fi router wired to the mixer provides the access point to the mixer. The TouchMix-30 Pro connects directly to the router using CAT5 cable. TouchMix-8 and TouchMix-16 require an inexpensive USB to Ethernet adapter for more information see https://www.qsc. com/live-sound/resources/software-and-firmware/touchmix/ethernet/.
· Advantages Simple to set up. Good range and robust connection (depending on the Wi-Fi router). External routers will have higher power and far better antennae compared to a USB adapter. Many of them will also be able to operate in the less crowded 5 GHz channels. If the router has an Internet connection, it can alert you to and download firmware updates.
· Disadvantages One more piece of gear to carry and connect.
Setting it up
Unless you are skilled in digital network configuration, do not use a router with non-standard, custom settings. If using a multi-port router, do not connect the mixer to the Internet port (the Internet jack will usually be a different color than the other ports).
To Setup Network: Menu
Network
1. Mixer Name = Enter a mixer name 2. Network Type = Wired 3. ired Network Settings = Auto IP Address (DHCP) 4. If the router is powered and properly connected, Connection Status = Connected 5. Touch Apply 6. The mixer configures the network and a message "Wired Ethernet connection operational" displays. 7. Touch Okay Your devices will now connect to the mixer via the router using the router's SSID (router name) and password.
Connecting to a Facility's Network
Networks in commercial facilities have been set up by IT professionals who are concerned about security. They may be very reluctant to allow you to connect a mixer to their network. But if they do, they will want to know two things.
What port do you want them to give you? Answer any open port will work. The mixer will find it. What services do you need? Answer none. The mixer implements zero-configuration networking using Bonjour®.
1001108-01-E
111
Wireless Network Setup: Create New Network
IMPORTANT!: USB Wi-Fi adapter (QSC Part # cp-000033-00)
Press
Touch
Touch
Menu
Network
Wireless
Create New Network using a USB Wi-Fi dongle provides short range wireless communication between the TouchMix mixer and Android and/or iOS devices with the TouchMix app installed.
1. Mixer Name!: Enter a name for the network. 2. Network Type: Set to ireless. 3. Select Create New Network. 4. Set Network Password: Enter a ten-digit
(numerical) password.
5. Apply Touch to configure the network. The network is ready for use. External devices may now login to the mixer using the Mixer Name and Password.
Menu
Network
Wireless
Main Mix L/R
Network Setup
Joe's Monitor
Aux 1
Aux 2
Aux 2
Aux 3
Aux 3
Aux 4
Aux 4
Aux 5
Aux 5
Aux 6
Aux 6
Aux 7
Aux 7
Aux 8
Aux 8
Aux 9
Aux 9
Aux 10
Aux 10
Aux 11
Aux 11
Aux 12
Aux 12
Aux 13
Aux 13
Aux 14
Aux 14
1
Mixer Name:
My TM-30
2
Network Type: Wireless
Wired
Wireless Network Settings
Connect to Existing Network
3
Create New Network
4
Set Password:
0123456789
5
Apply
Scene: Default
Main
Cue
Main
L/R
10
5 L
u AF
5
10
0
20
40
Mute
1001108-01-E
112
Wireless Network Setup: Connect to Existing Network
IMPORTANT!: Requires an Ethernet Wi-Fi router and the USB Wi-Fi adapter (QSC Part # cp-000033-00).
Connecting to an Existing Network using a USB Wi-Fi dongle provides short range wireless communication between a TouchMix mixer and a longer range wireless Ethernet router. The Android and/or iOS devices with the TouchMix app installed communicate with the TouchMix via the Ethernet wireless router.
1. Mixer Name: Enter a name for the mixer. 2. Network Type: Set to ireless. 3. Select Connect to Existing Network. 4. Network SSID!: Enter a known SSID of an
Ethernet wireless router, or touch Scan. Select the desired network from the list that displays. 5. Scan The mixer searches for, and displays, a list of available wireless networks. Select the desired network. 6. Password: Enter the password for the network being joined. 7. Security!: Select the Security setting used by the network. 8. Apply Touch to configure the mixer. External devices may now log on to the mixer using the external network Name and Password.
Menu
Main Mix L/R
Joe's Monitor
Aux 1
Aux 2
Aux 2
Aux 3
Aux 3
Aux 4
Aux 4
Aux 5
Aux 5
Aux 6
Aux 6
Aux 7
Aux 7
Aux 8
Aux 8
Aux 9
Aux 9
Aux 10
Aux 10
Aux 11
Aux 11
Aux 12
Aux 12
Aux 13
Aux 13
Aux 14
Aux 14
Press
Touch
Touch
Menu
Network
Wireless
Network
Wireless
Network Setup
1
Mixer Name:
My TM-30
2
Network Type: Wireless
Wired
Scene: Default
Main
Wireless Network Settings
3
Connect to Existing Network
Create New Network
Network SSID:
4
External Router
5 Scan
Password:
6
Password
Security
7
WEP-40
WPA (AES+TKIP)
WPA2 (CCMP)
Cue
Main
L/R
10
5 L
u AF
5
10
0
20
Signal Strength:
8
Apply
40
Mute
Select a Network: Found Networks
Wireless ABC Joe's Network TM-30 - practice only
Select
Cancel
1001108-01-E
113
Wired Network Setup: Static IP Address
IMPORTANT!: For TouchMix-30 Pro, connect an Ethernet router to the mixer's RJ45 jack. For TouchMix-8 and TouchMix-16 connect a compatible USB to Ethernet adapter to the mixer's USB port. (for compatible adapters, visit qsc.com and search for "Ethernet".
Using a ired Network Setup with a Static IP Address provides wired communications between a TouchMix and a wireless Ethernet router. Make sure there is no other equipment connected to the same network with the same IP address.
1. Mixer Name!: Enter a name for the network.
Press
Touch
Menu
Network
Menu
Network
Wired
Main Mix L/R
Joe's Monitor
Aux 1
Aux 2
Aux 2
Aux 3
Aux 3
Aux 4
Aux 4
Aux 5
Aux 5
Aux 6
Aux 6
Aux 7
Aux 7
Aux 8
Network Setup
1
Mixer Name:
My TM-30
2
Network Type: Wireless Wired
Wired Network Settings
3
Static IP Address
Auto IP Address (DHCP)
Network Address:
4
192.168.1.112
Network Mask:
5
255.255.255.0
2. Network Type: Set to ired.
Aux 8
Aux 9
3. Select Static IP Address to use a static IP address Aux9
for the mixer.
Aux 10
Aux 10
4. Enter the Network Address for the mixer.
Aux 11
Aux 11
5. Enter the Network Mask
Aux 12
Gateway Address:
6
192.168.1.254
7
Connection Status:
Connected
6. Enter the Nateway Address
Aux 12
Aux 13
7. Connection Status!:
Aux 13
Aux 14
a. Connected Displays to confirm successful
Aux 14
connection to the network. External devices
may now login to the mixer using the external
network Name and Password.
8
Apply
b. No Cable Detected Mixer is not connected to a network.
8. Apply Touch apply and the mixer will configure the network connections. .
Touch Wired
Scene: Default
Main
Cue
Main
L/R
10
5 L
u AF
5
10
0
20
40
Mute
1001108-01-E
114
Wired Network Setup: Auto IP Address (DHCP)
IMPORTANT!: For TouchMix-30 Pro, connect an Ethernet router to the mixer's RJ45 jack. For TouchMix-8 and TouchMix-16 connect a compatible USB to Ethernet adapter to the mixer's USB port. (for compatible adapters, visit qsc.com and search for "Ethernet".
Menu
Network
Wired
Main Mix L/R
Joe's Monitor
Aux 1
Network Setup
1
Mixer Name:
My TM-30
Press
Touch
Menu
Network
2
Network Type: Wireless Wired
Aux 2
Using a ired Network Setup with a Auto IP
Aux 2
Aux 3
Address (DHCP) provides wired communications
Aux 3
between a TouchMix and a wireless Ethernet router.
Aux 4
The DHCP provides an unused IP address for the
Aux 4
Aux 5
TouchMix. It may be different each time you connect to
Aux 5
the network.
Aux 6
Aux 6
1. Mixer Name!: Enter a name for the network.
Aux 7
Aux 7
2. Network Type: Set to ired.
Aux 8
Wired Network Settings
Static IP Address
3
Auto IP Address (DHCP)
Assigned IP Address:
4
192.168.1.112
3. Select Auto IP Address (DHCP) to set the IP
Aux 8
Aux 9
Address automatically.
Aux 9
4. The mixer searches for an IP address from
Aux 10
Aux 10
the network and enters it in the Assigned IP
Aux 11
Address field.
Aux 11
Aux 12
5. Connection Status!:
Aux 12
Aux 13
a. Connected Displays to confirm successful
Aux 13
connection to the network. External devices
Aux 14
may now login to the mixer using the external
Aux 14
network Name and Password.
5
Connection Status:
No Cable Detected
6
Apply
b. No Cable Detected Mixer is not connected to a network.
6. Apply Touch apply and the mixer will configure the network connections.
Touch Wired
Scene: Default
Main
Cue
Main
L/R
10
5 L
u AF
5
10
0
20
40
Mute
1001108-01-E
115
TouchMix-30 Pro Phones and Monitor
Phones and Monitor Level Control and Monitor settings.
NOTE!: By default, no audio signal is sent to the Phones / Monitor
Phones
Outputs. To send audio channel signals (including Main L/R) to the Phones
/ Monitor Outputs. Enable the Cue button for the channels you want to
Phones
listen to.
1
Phones Level
10
5
1. Phones / Cue Level Controls the level of the signal on the Phones outputs.
U
-5
Monitor Level and Settings
-10
-20
1. Source (Monitor) Select the source you want to send to the Monitor output.
2. In Engages / bypasses the delay. -40
3. Delay The delay is used to align the audio coming from a distant stage with the
near-field monitor signal heard at the mixer position. Digital readouts are in feet,
milliseconds, and meters.
Close
4. Adjust the output level for the Monitor.
Press Phones
OR
Press Monitor
Monitor
Monitor
1 Source
Aux 1
Aux 2
Aux 3
Aux 4
Aux 5
Aux 6
Aux 7
Aux 8
Aux 9
Aux 10
Aux 11
Aux 12
Aux 13
Aux 14
Main LR
Cue
2
In
Delay
3
0.00 ms 0.00 feet 0.00 m
Close
10 5 U -5 -10 -20
-40
4
TouchMix-8 and TouchMix-16 Phones and TouchMix-16 Monitor
Controls the output level for the Phones Cue and Monitor Cue
Phones
Monitor
NOTE!: The Monitor Level control is available only on the TouchMix-16.
1
Phones (1) and Monitor (2) Level Controls the level of the Cue signal on the Phones and Monitor outputs.
NOTE!: By default, no audio signal is sent to the Phones / Monitor Outputs. To send audio channel signals (including Main LR) to the Phones / Monitor Outputs. 2 Enable the Cue button for the channels you want to listen to.
Press Phones
OR
Press Monitor
1001108-01-E
116
Recording Setup Multitrack USB
Recall, initiate, and manage Multitrack recording sessions. Scroll down for Recalling a session. 1. Current Session Displays the name of the
currently active session. 2. New Session
NOTE!: When a new session is created, it is made the "Current Session".
a. New Session button Touch to start creating a new session.
b. New Session Name dialog Touch the edit field to enter a name for the new session.
NOTE!: You cannot create a new session named "DEFAULT" or rename "DEFAULT".
c. Create button Touch to create (save) the New Session. A dialog displays asking if you want to create a new session named "<your session name>". Touch Yes to create, or Cancel.
1. Rename a. In the USB Sessions list, select the session you want to rename. b. Rename button Touch to change the name of the selected session. c. Rename Current Session To!: dialog Touch the edit field to rename the selected session. d. Rename button Touch to save the renamed session.
To return to the main Record / Play screen, press Rec/Play.
Press Rec / Play
Touch Recording
Mode
Touch Multitrack USB Drive
Touch Recording
Setup
Touch New Session
OR
Touch Rename
Rec / Play
Recording Mode
Multitrack USB Drive
Recording Setup
New Session OR
Rename
Main Mix L/R
Recording Setup
Joe's Monitor
Aux 1
1
Current Session
Aux 2
Aux 2
Aux 3
Aux 3
Aux 4
Aux 4
Aux 5
Aux 5
Aux 6
Aux 6
Aux 7
Aux 7
Aux 8
Aux 8
Aux 9
Aux 9
Aux 10
Aux 10
Aux 11
Aux 11
Aux 12
Aux 12
Aux 13
Aux 13
Aux 14
Aux 14
DEFAULT
3a
DEFAULT JOE SONG 1
3b
Rename
2a
New Session
USB Sessions
Scene: Default
Main
Cue
Main
L/R
10
5 L
u F
5
10
0
20
40
Mute
New Session Name
2b
DEFAULT
2c
Create
Cancel
Rename Current Session To: 3c
Session rename
3d
Rename
Cancel
1001108-01-E
117
Recall Session Multitrack USB
Recalls multi-track sessions from a USB drive.
Recalling a Multitrack USB session tells the mixer to record in an existing recording file structure on the inserted USB drive. Each time recordings starts and stops, a .wav file is created in any subdirectory associated with armed tracks.
IMPORTANT!: Formatting the USB drive will remove all data on the drive.
1. USB Sessions Displays a list of all USB recording sessions on the USB drive in the Mixer USB port. Touch a USB session name to recall.
2. Record Pick_Off · Pre Recorded audio is not affected by the dynamics or EQ processors. · Post Recorded audio is affected by the dynamics and EQ processors.
3. Format USB Drive Formats the currently installed USB drive in the Mixer's USB port.
4. Recall Touch to recall the selected USB Session. To return to the main Record / Play screen, press Rec/Play
Press
Touch
Touch
Touch
Rec /
Recording
Multitrack
Recording
Play
Mode
USB Drive
Setup
Rec / Play
Recording Mode
Multitrack USB Drive
Recording Setup
Main Mix L/R
Recording Setup
Joe's Monitor
Aux 1
Aux 2
Aux 2
Aux 3
Aux 3
Aux 4
Aux 4
Aux 5
Aux 5
Aux 6
Aux 6
Aux 7
Aux 7
Aux 8
Aux 8
Aux 9
Aux 9
Aux 10
Aux 10
Aux 11
Aux 11
Aux 12
Aux 12
Aux 13
Aux 13
Aux 14
Aux 14
Current Session
DEFAULT
1
DEFAULT JOE SONG 1
2
Record Pick-Off
Pre
Post
USB Sessions
4
Recall
Rename
New Session
Scene: Default
Main
Cue
Main
L/R
10
5 L
u F
5
10
0
20
3
Format USB Drive
40
Mute
1001108-01-E
118
Aux Mix on Faders
The Aux Mix on Faders provides a view of a single Aux Mix
Press
Select a
Select an
Home
Fader Bank
Aux Mix
(or Aux Bus) with large faders. By selecting different fader
banks, you can see and adjust everything that is sent to the selected Aux bus.
Inputs 17-24
Inputs 1-8
Aux 1
Aux 1
Here is an example.
Main Mix
L/R
1
Scene: Default
1. Select fader bank Inputs 18 (1) 2. Select Aux 1 (2)
Aux 1
Aux 1
3
In 1
In 2
In 3
In 4
In 5
In 6
In 7
In 8
Aux 1
Aux 2
3. The faders you see (6) are the Aux Sends from Input
Aux 2
4
Aux 3
channels 18 going to Aux Mix 1. Aux 3
4. Select FX Masters (1).
Aux 4
Aux 4
5. The faders you see are the Aux Sends from the FX Masters going to Aux Mix 1.
Aux 5
5
Aux 5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Aux 6
6. Notice that when you select Aux Mix 1 some of the
Aux 6
2
small white faders in the fader banks are missing.
Aux 7
8
Aux 7
These channels are not available to the selected Aux Aux 8
Mix. The channels that are not available to the Aux Mix Aux8
Aux 9
are the Aux channels.
Aux 9
6
TouchMix-30 Pro
Aux 10
Aux 10
Aux 11
7
The TouchMix-30 Pro is a little different. For Aux Mixes
Aux 11
18 it is the same as TouchMix-8 and TouchMix-16.
Aux 12
Aux 12
However, if you select Aux Mix 914 you will notice that
Aux 13
Aux channels 18 are now available. This means that you Aux13
can send an already-mixed Aux output (any or all of Aux
Aux 14
Aux 14
Mixes 18) to one or more of the Aux Mixes 914.
Mute
Mute
Mute
Mute
Mute
Mute
Mute
9 Mute
TouchMix-30 Pro Auxes are doing double duty as Mix Matrices. A Mix Matrix lets the operator take existing main, auxiliary and sub group mixes and create a new mix from them.
Summary
Here's what can be mixed on to the Auxes: · Auxes 18!: All TouchMix models All Inputs, all Effects / TouchMix-30 Pro Only Main L/R, all Sub Groups · Auxes 914!: (TouchMix-30 Pro Only) All Inputs, all Effects, Main L/R, all Sub Groups, Auxes 18
NOTE!: To add the Main L/R to an Aux Mix, select Aux Out 914 fader bank.
Control Descriptions:
1. Fader Bank selectors Touch a Fader Bank number to display the selected Aux Mix for the selected Fader Bank. 2. Aux Mix select buttons Select an Aux Mix to display that Aux Mix for the selected Fader Bank. 3. Channel select and friendly name Touch a channel selector to access all the details for that channel. You can change this name in the
channel's Setup screen. 4. Cue buttons Sends signal from the channel input to the Phones and/or Monitor outputs. 5. System Channel Name labels 1 Mic, 2 Mic, and so on, do not change. 6. Aux Send faders Adjusts the audio level of the selected channel to the selected Aux Mix. Color coded to match the Aux Mix Select buttons. 7. Channel Input meter Displays the pre-fader / post-compressor & gate audio level of the channel. 8. Aux Mix Master fader Adjusts the overall level of the selected Aux Mix. This level includes all Aux Sends to this Aux Mix. Changes when a
different Aux Mix is selected. 9. Mute buttons Mutes the Aux Send only for the associated channel.
· Orange: Indicates that the channel is muted from the Main L/R mix, a mute group or a DCA group. · Red: Indicates the channel is muted for the selected Aux mix.
1001108-01-E
119
)
Patch Matrix (TouchMix-30 Pro only)
Manages connections between physical inputs and on-
Press Menu
Touch Patch Matrix
screen channels.
1. Preset Displays the name of the current preset.
Menu
Patch Matrix
"Default routing" is the Reset or factory default
Main Mix
Scene:
Preset.
L/R
Patch Matrix
Default
2. Save / Recall button Navigates to the Patch Matrix Preset screen where patch matrix settings may be stored or recalled. Use Home to return to the Patch Matrix screen.
3. Reset button Restores the default settings.
Joe's Monitor
Aux 1
Aux 2
Aux 2
1
Preset
Default Routing
2
To con gure routing, select an Analog Input from the top row, then select Destination Channels from the right column.
Save / Recall
Input Input
1
2
Input Input
3
4
Input Input
5
6
4
Input Input Input Input
7
8
9
10
Input Input 11 12
Input Input 13 14
5
Input Input 15 16
Aux 3
Aux 3
Aux 4
3
Reset
Patch Matrix
1 Kick 2 Snare
Main
Cue
4. Input select buttons Used to select a physical
Aux 4
Aux 5
input for rerouting.
Aux 5
3 Hat 4 Tom
Main
L/R
5. / Moves between Input groups 116 and
Aux 6
Aux 6
1730.
Aux 7
6. Channel select buttons Selects the Channel to be
Aux 7
Aux 8
connected to the selected Input.
Aux 8
7. Channels 17-30 and Channels 116
Aux 9
Aux 9
Moves between channel groups 116 and 1730.
Aux 10
Aux 10
Using the Patch Matrix
Aux 11
5 Tom
10
6 6 Tom
5
L
7 CH
u F
8 CH
5
9 E Bass
10
10 Ac Guitar 11 Ac Guitar
0
20
12 Sax
Aux 11
Aux 12
NOTE!: The Patch Matrix should be used
Aux 12
Aux 13
with care. It is easy to set up confusing
Aux 13
routings that make troubleshooting
Aux 14
difficult.
Aux 14
13 Trombone 14 Kazoo 15 Cajone hole 16 Cajone Slap
7 Channels 17-30
40
Mute
The image illustrates a "mult" (short for multiple connection). Perhaps the mixer operator needs to apply different channel processing to the Acoustic Guitar for Mains and Monitors.
1. Open the Patch Matrix. 2. Select the input the Acoustic Guitar is connected to (Input 10). 3. Mult the input to the second channel by touching 11 Ac Guitar. Input 10 is now feeding both channels. 4. Any input can be routed to any channel or any combination of channels. 5. When an input is re-patched, the channel name changes to include the name of the physical input. In the above example, channel 11 would
become "[In 10] Ac Guitar".
1001108-01-E
120
Copy and Paste
The TouchMix-30 Pro has a powerful but simple copy and paste function that is operated by the U7 (copy) and U8 (paste) buttons. Copy and Paste is context sensitive so that what you are looking at is what will be copied. Only like things may be copied and pasted from and to each other. For example, a PEQ cannot be pasted to a GEQ. The table below explains what parameters will be copied and pasted.
NOTE!: The copy buffer retains the last item of each type that has been copied. If, for example a GEQ setting is copied and then a Gate is copied, both will reside in memory. If a GEQ is displayed, Paste will recall the copied GEQ parameters. If a Gate is displayed, Gate parameters will be pasted.
To Copy and Paste Parameters: · Navigate to the screen that displays the values to be copied. · For the TouchMix-30 Pro Press U7, for the TouchMix-8 and TouchMix-16 Press U2 (Copy) · Navigate to the destination screen. · TouchMix-30 Pro Press U8, TouchMix-8 and TouchMix-16 Press U3 (Paste) Let's say you want to copy the mix that's on Auxiliary 1 to Auxiliary 5...
Press Home
Touch an Aux Bank
Touch an Aux Channel
Press U7 / U2 Copy
Touch an Aux Channel
Press U8 / U3 Paste
Aux Out 1-8
Inputs 1-8
Aux 1
U7 U2
Aux 5
U8 U3
After set-up is complete, it may be useful to clear the Copy/Paste buffer. This will prevent accidentally pasting parameters during the show. To clear the Copy / Paste memory:
Press
Touch
Touch
Menu
Copy/Paste
Yes
Menu
Copy / Paste
Yes
hat is Displayed
Main or Auxiliary Faders View Input Channel Overview Tab Input Channel EQ Tab Input Channel Comp Tab Input Channel Gate Tab Input Channel FX Tab Input Channel Aux Tab Input Channel Setup Tab Output Channel Overview Tab Output Channel PEQ Tab Output Channel GEQ Tab Output Channel Anti-Feedback Tab
hat is Copied and Pasted
Fader, Mute and Pan EQ, Compressor, Gate, FX sends, Aux Sends, Digital Gain, Delay, Group Assigns, Polarity All channel EQ parameters All channel Compressor parameters All channel Gate parameters All channel FX send levels All channel Auxiliary Send levels and Pan positions Recording Arm, Polarity, Delay, Digital Gain, Group assignments PEQ, Limiter, FX sends, Aux Sends, Delay, Group Assigns, Polarity, Pick-Off Point (Auxes only) All channel PEQ parameters All channel GEQ parameters All channel Anti-feedback parameters
1001108-01-E
121
hat is Displayed
Output Channel Limiter Tab Output Channel FX Tab Output Channel Aux Tab Output Channel Setup Tab FX Channel Overview Tab FX Channel EQ Tab FX Channel Preset Tab FX Channel Aux Tab Sub Group Overview Tab Sub Group EQ Tab Sub Group Limiter Tab Sub Group FX Tab Sub Group Aux Tab
hat is Copied and Pasted
All channel Limiter parameters All channel FX send levels All channel Auxiliary Send levels and Pan positions Recording Arm, Polarity, Delay, Digital Gain, Group assignments Current Preset, EQ, Pick-Off Point, Group Assigns, Polarity All FX channel EQ parameters Processor and Preset selection, FX Returns and Pans to Aux All FX Channel Auxiliary Send levels and Pan positions PEQ, Limiter, FX sends, Aux Sends, Group Assigns All Sub Group PEQ parameters All Sub Group Limiter parameters All Sub Group FX send levels All Sub Group Auxiliary Send levels and Pan positions
1001108-01-E
122
TouchMix Dimensions
TouchMix-30 Pro
435 mm 17.1 in
428 mm 16.9 in
191 mm 7.5 in
1001108-01-E
459 mm 18.1 in
123
191 mm 7.5 in
2.2 in (56 mm)
TouchMix-8
USB
®
13.1 in (333 mm)
Power
Phones
Cue / Monitor
Aux 3/4
Right
Left
4
3
2
1
Aux 1
Aux 2
Aux 3
Aux 4
Main Left
Main Right
Phones
TouchMix - 8
1
2
Instrument
1
Trim
2
Trim
3
3
Trim
4
4
Trim
5
5
Trim
6
6
Trim
7
7
Trim
8
8
Trim
Stereo In
9/10
Phantom +48V
FX Mute
Info
Stereo In
11/12
Standby
Mute Groups
Home
Menu
Record/ Play
Cue/ Monitor
Wizard
Aux 3/4
U2
U3
User
0
User
U1
U4
Press for fine
9.6 in (245 mm)
1001108-01-E
124
2.3 in (58 mm)
TouchMix-16
14.2 in (360 mm)
Power
Talkback
Main Right
Main Left
Aux 6
USB
®
Aux 5
Aux 4
Aux 3
Aux 2
Aux 1
Aux 1
Aux 2
Aux 3
Aux 4
Aux 5
Aux 6
Main Left Main Right Talkback
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Stereo In
17/18
Aux Out
7/8
Cue
TouchMix - 16
Stereo In
19/20
Aux Out
9/10
Monitor
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Trim
10
Trim
11
Trim
12
Trim
13
Trim
14
Trim
15
Trim
16
Trim
Menu
Record/ Play
Phantom +48V
Standby
Wizard
Info
Aux Phones
FX Mute
Talkback Talk
Mute Groups
Monitor
User
0
User
U2
U3
User
User
U1
U4
Press for fine
11.5 in (291 mm)
1001108-01-E
125
TouchMix Block Diagram
Mic/Line Input Channels
Meter
nnels
+48 V Trim
Mic Pre
TouchMix-30: Ch 1 - 20 TouchMix-16: Ch 1 - 12 TouchMix-8: Ch 5 - 8
Over
Digital
Gain
Input
A/D
Polarity Delay Low Cut High Cut PEQ
Digital
Digital
Gain
+48 V Trim
Mic Pre Pad
TouchMix-30: Ch 21 - 24 TouchMix-16: Ch 13 - 16 TouchMix-8: Ch 2 & 3
+48 V
Trim
Mic Pre
Pad Hi-Z Pad Hi-Z
TouchMix-8: Ch 1 & 2
TouchMix-16: In 16 TouchMix-8: In 8 To Room Tuning Wizard
To DAW*
Patch Matrix*
Recording Mode*
USB Drive DAW*
USB Drive
DAW*
* TouchMix-30 only
1001108-01-E
Side Chain Matrix
RTA Pitch Corrector 1 per Mixer Assignable
126
Ch Fader
From DCA Masters
Mute Logic L R
Gate Comp
Detector In
Post Pre
Side Chain
GGaainin
Pan Mute
Assign
Post FX Send
Mute
Pre
Aux Send (to stereo)
Pan
Mute
Post Fdr Pre Fdr Pre Dyn Pre all
Aux Send (to mono)
Mute
Post Fdr Pre Fdr Pre Dyn Pre all
Record Pick-O
Post
(Global)
Pre
Pre Cue
Post
Main Outputs Sub-Groups (odd) * Sub-Groups (even) * Aux (Odd) Aux (Even) F X
Cue To Multi-Track
LR
Stereo Input Channels
Meter
Over
A/D
A/D TouchMix-30: Ch 25 - 28
Digital Gain Input
Delay Low Cut High Cut PEQ
Digital Post
Pre
Top Panel Jack
TouchMix-30: Ch 29 & 30
TouchMix-16: Ch 17/18, 19/20 TouchMix-8: Ch 9/10, 11/12
To DAW*
Patch Matrix*
Recording Mode*
USB Drive
USB Drive
DAW* USB Drive
DAW*
DAW*
SUM RTA
Ch Fader
Gate Comp
Detector In
From DCA Masters
Mute Logic
GGaainin
Width
Mute
LR
Assign
FX Send SUM Post Level
Pre SUM
Aux Send (Stereo) Level
Post Fdr Pre Fdr Pre Dyn Pre all
Balance
Mute Mute
Aux Send (Mono)
Post Fdr Pre Fdr Pre Dyn Pre all
Level Mute
SUM
Record Pick-O Pre (Global)
Post
Pre Cue
Post
* TouchMix-30 only
1001108-01-E
127
Main Outputs Sub-Groups (odd) * Sub-Groups (even) * Aux (Odd) Aux (Even) F X
Cue To Multi-Track
LR
Main Output
Main Outputs Sub-Groups (odd) * Sub-Groups (even) * Aux (Odd) Aux (Even) F X
Cue To Multi-Track
LR
LR
Main Fader
From DCA Masters
Limiter
Room
User EQ Tuning
GEQ
GEQ
Speaker
PEQ
Preset
Room Tuning Wizard
From TouchMix-30: Talkback In TouchMix-16: In 16 TouchMix-8: In 8
Anti
Low Cut High Cut
Feedback
Feedback Wizard
Delay
Meter
D/A
GGaainin Mute
D/A
Cue
Main Left Main Right
Record
2-Track Record Pick-O
Level
Pre
Post Cue
SUM RTA
To Stereo Mode Auxes (Odd/R) To Stereo Mode Auxes (Odd/L)
Balance
To Mono Mode Auxes
SUM
TouchMix-30 Only
Aux. Level (9 - 14)
* TouchMix-30 only
1001108-01-E
128
Stereo Auxiliary Output
Main Outputs Sub-Groups (odd) * Sub-Groups (even) * Aux (Odd) Aux (Even) F X
Cue To Multi-Track
LR
* TouchMix-30 only
1001108-01-E
LR
Main Fader
From DCA Masters
User EQ
Room Tuning
Meter
D/A
Limiter
GEQ
GEQ
Speaker
Preset
PEQ
Anti
Low Cut High Cut
Feedback
Delay
GGaainin Mute
Room Tuning Wizard
From TouchMix-30: Talkback In TouchMix-16: In 16 TouchMix-8: In 8
Feedback Wizard
D/A
Odd Even
Cue
Record
2-Track Record Pick-O
Level
Pre
Post Cue
SUM RTA
Aux Level Main L/R
TouchMix-8 and TouchMix-16
To Stereo Mode Auxes (Odd/R) To Stereo Mode Auxes (Odd/L) To Mono Mode Auxes
Balance SUM
TouchMix-30 Only
Aux. Level (9 - 14)
L D/A R D/A
TouchMix-16 Only Auxes 7/8 & 9/10
Aux Out (Odd)
D/A Aux Out (Even)
D/A
TouchMix-30 Auxes 11/12 & 13/14 TouchMix-8 Auxes 3/4
129
Mono Auxiliary Output
Main Outputs Sub-Groups (odd) * Sub-Groups (even) * Aux (Odd) Aux (Even) F X
Cue To Multi-Track
LR
LR
Room
User EQ Tuning
Limiter
GEQ
GEQ
Speaker
PEQ
Preset
Room Tuning Wizard
From TouchMix-30: Talkback In TouchMix-16: In 16 TouchMix-8: In 8
Main Fader
Anti
Low Cut High Cut
Feedback
Delay
Feedback Wizard
RTA
From DCA Masters GGaainin Mute
D/A
Cue
Main Left
* TouchMix-30 only
1001108-01-E
Odd Auxes Even Auxes
TouchMix-8 and TouchMix-16
Aux Level
To Stereo Mode Auxes (Odd/L) Pan
To Stereo Mode Auxes (Odd/R)
To Mono Mode Auxes
TouchMix-30 Only, Auxes 1 - 8
Aux Level
Main L/R
130
Main Outputs Sub-Groups (odd) * Sub-Groups (even) * Aux (Odd) Aux (Even) F X
Cue To Multi-Track
Stereo Sub Group (TouchMix-30 only)
Ch Fader
From DCA Masters
Mute Logic
Meter
PEQ
Comp Low Cut High Cut GGaainin
Width
Mute
RTA SUM
Post FX Send SUM
SUM
Pre
Aux Send (Stereo)
Pan
Post Fdr Pre Fdr Pre Dyn Pre all
Pan
Mute Mute Mute
Aux Send (Mono)
Post Fdr Pre Fdr Pre Dyn Pre all
SUM
Mute
LR Assign
LR
* TouchMix-30 only
1001108-01-E
Pre Cue
Post
131
Main Outputs Sub-Groups (odd) * Sub-Groups (even) * Aux (Odd) Aux (Even) F X
Cue To Multi-Track
Mono Sub Group (TouchMix-30 only)
Ch Fader
From DCA Masters Mute Logic
Meter
LR
PEQ
Limiter Low Cut High Cut GGaainin
Pan
Mute
Assign
RTA
Post FX Send
Mute
Pre
Aux Send (Stereo)
Post Fdr Pre Fdr Pre Dyn Pre all
Pan Mute
Aux Send (Mono)
Post Fdr Pre Fdr Pre Dyn Pre all
Mute
LR
* TouchMix-30 only
1001108-01-E
Pre Cue
Post
132
Cue, Monitor, Talkback, Noise
Main Outputs Sub-Groups (odd) * Sub-Groups (even) * Aux (Odd) Aux (Even) F X
Cue To Multi-Track
LR
LR
+48 V *
Mic Pre
Talkback In
Monitor Source * -Aux -Main L/R -Cue
Monitor Level
TouchMix-30 only Monitor Level
TouchMix-16 only Phones Level
Noise Generator
Noise Level
To RTA & Room Tuning*
Talk Level A/D
TouchMix-16 & TouchMix-30 only
Delay
Enable Enable
D/A Monitor
D/A
Monitor D/A D/A
Phones D/A D/A
Main Aux es FX
* TouchMix-30 only
1001108-01-E
133
FX Return
Meter
Stereo Delay Mono Delay
Chorus Pitch Shift Dense Reverb Lush Reverb
Low Cut
PEQ
SUM RTA
Ch Fader
GGaainin
From DCA Masters Mute Logic
Balance
Mute
LR
Assign
Aux Send (Stereo) Balance Mute
Aux Send (Mono, Odd Auxes) Mute
SUM
Aux Send (Mono, Even Auxes) Mute
SUM
* TouchMix-30 only
1001108-01-E
134
Pre Cue
Post
Main Outputs Sub-Groups (odd) * Sub-Groups (even) * Aux (Odd) Aux (Even) F X
Cue To Multi-Track
LR
Main Outputs Sub-Groups (odd) * Sub-Groups (even) * Aux (Odd) Aux (Even) F X
Cue To Multi-Track
2-Track Playback
Meter
Source
Multi-Track Mode TouchMix-30: Tracks 31/32 TouchMix-16: Tracks 21/22 TouchMix-8: Tracks 13/14 Stereo MP3 Mode All models: From USB drive DAW Mode* TouchMix-30: DAW channels 31/32
Low Cut
PEQ
SUM RTA
Ch Fader
GGaainin
From DCA Masters Mute Logic
Balance
Mute
LR
Assign
Aux Send (Stereo)
Post Fdr Pre Fdr Pre Dyn Pre all
Balance
Mute
Aux Send (Mono)
Post Fdr Pre Fdr Pre Dyn Pre all
SUM
Mute
LR
1*0T0ou1c1h0M8ix--0301o-Enly
135
Pre Cue
Post
RTA (Real Time Analyzer)
Main Outputs Sub-Groups (odd) * Sub-Groups (even) * Aux (Odd) Aux (Even) F X
Cue To Multi-Track
LR
LR
From Talkback
Main L/R Talkback Follow Cue
Aux
* TouchMix-30 only
1001108-01-E
136
TouchMix-30: 2 instances of the RTA TouchMix-8 & 16: 1 instance of the RTA
®
Mailing Address:
QSC, LLC 1675 MacArthur Boulevard Costa Mesa, CA 92626-1468 USA
Telephone Numbers:
Main Number: +1.714.754.6175 Sales & Marketing: +1.714.957.7100 Toll Free (USA only) +1.800.854.4079 Customer Service: +1.714.957.7150 Toll Free (USA only) +1.800.772.2834
Facsimile Numbers:
Sales & Marketing FAX: +1.714.754.6174 Customer Service FAX: +1.714.754.6173
World Wide Web:
www.qsc.com
E-mail:
info@qsc.com service@qsc.com
© 2016 2019 QSC, LLC. All rights reserved. QSC, the QSC logo, and TouchMix are registered trademarks of QSC, LLC in the U.S. Patent and Trademark office and other countries. iPad, iPhone, iOS, and Bonjour are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Android is a trademark of Google Inc. Microsoft is a
trademark of Microsoft Corporation. PreSonus and FaderPort are trademarks of PreSonus Audio Electronics, Inc. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. http://patents.qsc.com.
Adobe InDesign 14.0 (Windows) www.ilovepdf.com